Pioneer SC-LX85 Owner Manual

SC-LX

SC-LX

85

75

IMPORTANT

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR

BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS

INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En

WARNING

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture.

D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En

WARNING

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully.

The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel.

D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_En

VENTILATION CAUTION

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation

(at least 20 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 20 cm at each side).

WARNING

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity:

+5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH

(cooling vents not blocked)

Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)

D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En

WARNING

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.

D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal.

The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En

CAUTION

The  STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.

Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the

AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.

Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.

If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

Blue : Neutral Brown : Live

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows;

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

D3-4-2-1-2-2*_A2_En

Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries

Symbol for equipment

Symbol examples for batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

These symbols are only valid in the European Union.

For countries outside the European Union:

If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Pb

K058a_A1_En

This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes

(such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.

K041_A1_En

2 En

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

Contents

01 Before you start

Our philosophy ................................................ 6

Features ........................................................... 6

Checking what’s in the box ............................ 7

Installing the receiver ..................................... 7

Loading the batteries ...................................... 7

Operating range of remote control unit........ 7

Flow for operating the receiver with RF two-way communications .............................. 7

About using AVNavigator

(included CD-ROM) ........................................ 8

02 Controls and displays

Remote control (In case of SC-LX85) ............ 9

Remote control (In case of SC-LX75) .......... 11

Display ........................................................... 12

Front panel .................................................... 13

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment ........................ 14

Rear panel ..................................................... 14

Connecting the RF adapter .......................... 15

Determining the speakers’ application ...... 15

Placing the speakers .................................... 17

Connecting the speakers ............................. 18

Installing your speaker system .................... 19

About the audio connection ........................ 24

About the video converter ............................ 24

About HDMI .................................................. 24

Connecting your TV and playback components .................................................. 25

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources ............... 26

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box ........................................... 27

Connecting other audio components ......... 27

Connecting the multichannel analog inputs ............................................................. 28

Connecting additional amplifiers ................ 28

Connecting AM/FM antennas ..................... 29

MULTI-ZONE setup ....................................... 29

Connecting to the network through

LAN interface ................................................ 30

Connecting optional Bluetooth

ADAPTER ...................................................... 31

Connecting an iPod ...................................... 31

Connecting a USB device ............................ 31

Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input ............ 31

Connecting to a wireless LAN ..................... 31

Connecting an IR receiver ........................... 32

Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor .................................. 32

Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger ................................ 33

Plugging in the receiver ............................... 33

04 Basic Setup

About remote control operation .................. 34

Changing the OSD display language

(OSD Language) ........................................... 34

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) ............... 34

The Input Setup menu .................................. 36

Operation Mode Setup ................................. 36

05 Basic playback


Playing a source ........................................... 38

Playing an iPod ............................................. 38

Playing a USB device ................................... 39

Listening to the radio .................................... 41

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless

Enjoyment of Music ...................................... 43

06 Listening to your system


Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes ........................... 45

Selecting MCACC presets ........................... 47

Choosing the input signal ............................ 47

Better sound using Phase Control .............. 47

Better sound using Phase Control and

Full Band Phase Control .............................. 48

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA

GALLERY inputs


Enjoying the Home Media Gallery ............... 49

Features of Home Media Gallery ................. 49

Introduction ................................................... 49

Playback with Home Media Gallery ............ 50

Advanced operations for Internet radio ...... 51

About network playback............................... 51

About playable file formats .......................... 53

08 Control with HDMI function


About the Control with HDMI function ....... 54

Making Control with HDMI connections .... 54

HDMI Setup................................................... 54

Before using synchronization ...................... 55

About synchronized operations .................. 55

Setting the PQLS function ........................... 56

About Auto Sound Retriever Link and

Stream Smoother Link ................................. 56

Cautions on the Control with HDMI function ......................................................... 56

09 Using other functions


Setting the Audio options ............................ 57

Setting the Video options ............................. 59

Switching the speaker terminals ................ 61

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls ................. 61

Making an audio or a video recording ........ 62

Reducing the level of an analog signal ....... 62

Using the sleep timer ................................... 62

Dimming the display .................................... 62

Switching the HDMI output ......................... 62

Checking your system settings ................... 63

Resetting the system .................................... 63

10 Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX85)

About the Remote Setup menu................... 64

Operating multiple receivers ....................... 64

Setting the remote to control other components .................................................. 64

Selecting preset codes directly ................... 65

Programming signals from other remote controls ............................................. 65

Erasing one of the remote control button settings .............................................. 66

Resetting the input assignment of one of the input function buttons ....................... 66

Resetting the remote control settings ........ 66

Confirming preset codes ............................. 66

Renaming input function names manually ........................................................ 66

Direct function .............................................. 66

Multi Operation and System Off .................. 67

Controlling components .............................. 68

Using the RF communications function .... 70

Operating this receiver by RF communications........................................... 71

Operating other components by RF communications........................................... 71

Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver ......................... 72

Setting the remote control operation mode .............................................................. 72

Precautions when using the Omni-

Directional RF Remote Control ................... 72

11 Controlling the rest of your system


About the Remote Setup menu................... 74

Operating multiple receivers ....................... 74

Setting the remote to control other components .................................................. 74

Selecting preset codes directly ................... 75

Programming signals from other remote controls ............................................. 75

En 3

4

Erasing one of the remote control button settings .............................................. 75

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function ........................................ 75

Direct function .............................................. 76

Setting the backlight mode ......................... 76

Multi Operation and System Off .................. 76

Resetting the remote control settings ........ 77

Controlling components .............................. 78

12 The Advanced MCACC menu


Making receiver settings from the

Advanced MCACC menu ............................. 80

Automatic MCACC (Expert) ......................... 80

Manual MCACC setup ................................. 82

Checking MCACC Data ................................ 85

Data Management........................................ 86

13 The System Setup and Other

Setup menus


Making receiver settings from the

System Setup menu ..................................... 87

Manual speaker setup .................................. 87

Network Setup menu ................................... 89

Checking the Network Information ............. 91

The Other Setup menu ................................. 91

14 Additional information

Troubleshooting 1 ......................................... 94

Troubleshooting 2 ....................................... 100

Troubleshooting of wireless LAN .............. 103

About status messages ............................. 104

Speaker Setting Guide................................ 105

Important information regarding the

HDMI connection ....................................... 106

Cleaning the unit ........................................ 106

Precautions when using the Wireless

LAN converter ............................................. 106

Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC .............. 107

Surround sound formats ........................... 108

About THX ................................................... 108

About iPod ................................................... 109

En

About FLAC ................................................. 110

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats ............ 110

Glossary ....................................................... 111

Features index ............................................. 114

Specifications ............................................. 115

Preset code list............................................ 116

Flow of settings on the receiver

Flow for connecting and setting the receiver

The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.

Required setting item : 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 7 , 9

Setting to be made as necessary : 6 , 8 , 10 , 11 , 12 , 13

Important

The receiver’s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator

CD-ROM included with the receiver. In this case, virtually the same connections and settings as in steps 2 , 3 , 4 , 6 , 7 , 8 and 9 can be made interactively. For instructions on using AVNavigator, see

About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 8.


!

Checking what’s in the box on page 7

!

Loading the batteries on page 7 j

2 Determining the speakers’ application (page 15)

!

[A] 9.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) connection

!

[B] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection

!

[C] 7.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

!

[D] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

!

[E] 7.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

!

[F] 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

!

[G] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2/ZONE 3 connection (Multi Zone)

SC-LX85 only:

!

[H] 5.2 channel surround system & Speaker B Bi-amping connection

!

[I] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Surround Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

!

[J] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Center Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) j

3 Connecting the speakers

!

Placing the speakers on page 17

!

Connecting the speakers on page 18

!

Installing your speaker system on page 19

!

Bi-amping your speakers on page 18 j

4 Connecting the components

!

About the audio connection on page 24

!

About the video converter on page 24

!

Connecting your TV and playback components on page 25

!

Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 29

!

Plugging in the receiver on page 33 j

5 Power On j

6 Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 34) j

7 MCACC speaker settings

!

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 j

8 The Input Setup menu (page 36)

(When using connections other than the recommended connections) j

9 Basic playback (page 38) j

10 Switching the HDMI output (page 62) j

11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired

!

Using the various listening modes (page 45)

!

Better sound using Phase Control (page 47)

!

Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control (page 48)

!

Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 80)

!

Changing the channel level while listening (page 89)

!

Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement

(page 57)

!

Setting the PQLS function (page 56)

!

Setting the Audio options (page 57)

!

Setting the Video options (page 59) j

12 Other optional adjustments and settings

!

Control with HDMI function (page 54)

!

The Advanced MCACC menu (page 80)

!

The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 87) j

13 Making maximum use of the remote control

In case of SC-LX85

!

Operating multiple receivers (page 64)

!

Setting the remote to control other components (page 64)

!

Using the RF communications function (page 70)


!

Operating multiple receivers (page 74)

!

Setting the remote to control other components (page 74)

En 5


6

Before you start

Our philosophy

Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater listening experience as close as possible to the vision of the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing on three important steps:

1 Achieving the highest possible sound quality

2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area

3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world-class studio engineers

With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated AIR Studios

Monitor:

Features

% Apple AirPlay®

With AirPlay you can stream music from iTunes to the SC-LX85 and SC-LX75 and play it through your home cinema system. You can even use the receiver to view metadata including song title, artist as well as album art on a connected display. With Pioneer’s Air Play-compatible receivers, you can easily enjoy your iTunes music in any room in the house.

% HOME MEDIA GALLERY

This receiver can play back contents stored on your computer when your computer is connected to the LAN terminal of this receiver.

% About operation of the receiver with a mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.)

The receiver can be controlled from the mobile terminal by installing a special application on the mobile terminal. For details, see the product information on the Pioneer website.

This special application may be changed or discontinued without notice.

% iControlAV2 Remote Control App compatible

The SC-LX85 and SC-LX75 are compatible with a completely re-designed remote control application for iPod touch, iPhone and now iPad.

Improvements include a comprehensive front page layout, iPad rotation, DLNA and vTuner control, new exciting Finger EQ, and Pioneer compatible Blu-ray Disc player control. iControlAV2 is free from the App Store.

% Air Jam App compatible

For the SC-LX85 and SC-LX75, the optional

AS-BT200 Bluetooth adapter works together with Pioneer’s exclusive Air Jam application.

Available free in the App Store, Air Jam allows up to 4 iPhone, iPod touch or iPod devices to share music and create a group playlist for a unique and fun social music network experience.

% AVNavigator

The CD-ROM (AVNavigator) included with this unit provides a variety of functions, such as

Wiring Navi with a guide for connecting the unit and setting up from the computer and an

Interactive Manual for operating the unit while reading the manual.

% HDMI (3D, Audio Return Channel)

A compatible component is required to use the above function.

% PQLS Bit-stream

Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS-compatible player with

HDMI connections.

% Auto Sound Retriever Link

By connecting a Pioneer player supporting the

Sound Retriever Link function, compressed audio files played on the player can be corrected automatically to play the sound with higher density.

% Stream Smoother Link

By connecting a Pioneer player supporting the

Stream Smoother Link function, compressed video or movie files played on the player can be corrected automatically to play them with a more natural, easily viewable picture.

% iPod playback

Your iPod can be connected to the receiver’s

USB terminal to play the music/video files on the iPod.

Also, the iPod is charged when it is connected to the receiver.

% Direct Energy HD Amplifier

The “Direct Energy HD (High Fidelity Class D) amplifier” is an amplifier developed by Pioneer based on the latest high performance Class D amplifier and concentrating the essence of high sound quality design. This new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding performance with high sound quality and reproduces the latest in multi-channel digital contents.

% Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible

Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontallyoriented sound field. The height channel strengthens the sound field’s sense of threedimensionality and air, producing presence and expansion.

% Internet Radio

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations.

% Bluetooth compatible

Using the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or

AS-BT200) lets you enjoy music files on an iPhone or other Bluetooth wireless technology device wirelessly.

% Auto Sound Retriever

The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs

DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left over after compression.

% Easy setup using Advanced MCACC

The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic

Calibration EQ.

% RF two-way communications function

Using the CU-RF100, the information shown of the receiver’s display can be displayed on the remote control in your hands and you can operate the remote control without worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control is pointing.

!

The CU-RF100 is included with the SC-LX85, sold separately with the SC-LX75.

En

Before you start 01

Checking what’s in the box

Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:


!

Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)

!

Omni-directional remote control (CU-RF100)

!

RF adapter

!

IR blaster cable x2

!

AA/LR6 dry cell batteries x4

!

AM loop antenna

!

FM wire antenna

!

iPod cable

!

Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)

— Quick start guide

— CD-ROM (Operating instructions)

— Connecting cable

!

Power cord

!

CD-ROM (AVNavigator)

!

Warranty card

!

Quick start guide


!

Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)

!

Remote control unit

!

AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm system operation) x2

!

AM loop antenna

!

FM wire antenna

!

iPod cable

!


— Quick start guide

— CD-ROM (Operating instructions)

— Connecting cable

!

Power cord

!


!

Warranty card

!

Quick start guide

Installing the receiver

!

When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a level and stable surface.

!

Don’t install it on the following places:

— on a color TV (the screen may distort)

— near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.

— in direct sunlight

— in damp or wet areas

— in extremely hot or cold areas

— in places where there is vibration or other movement

— in places that are very dusty

— in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)

CAUTION

Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:

!

Never use new and old batteries together.

!

Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.

!

Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.

!

When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution’s rules that apply in your country/area.

Loading the batteries



The batteries included with the unit are to check initial operations; they may not last over a long period. We recommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life.

Operating range of remote control unit

The remote control may not work properly if:

!

There are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver’s remote sensor.

!

Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor.

!

The receiver is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays.

!

The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit.

30°

30°

WARNING

!

Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.

7 m

Note

By connecting an RF adapter to the RS-232C and CU-RF100 terminals (SC-LX85) /

EXTENSION terminals (SC-LX75), the CU-RF100 omni-directional remote control can be used for

RF two-way communications with the receiver.

With RF two-way communications, the information of the receiver’s display can be displayed on the remote control in your hands and the remote control can be operated without worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control is pointing. For details, see

Flow for operating the receiver with RF two-way communications on page 7.

!

The RF adapter and CU-RF100 omnidirectional remote control are included with the SC-LX85, sold separately with the SC-LX75.

!

The maximum line-of-sight distance for RF two-way communications is about 10 meters.

This line-of-sight communications distance is a rough indication, and may differ according to the surrounding environment.

Flow for operating the receiver with RF two-way communications

SC-LX85 only

This remote control unit is set for operations using infrared signals upon shipment from the factory. To set it for RF operations, take the steps below.

1 Connecting the RF adapter to the RS-

232C and CU-RF100 terminals.

!

Connecting the RF adapter on page 15

2 Setting the ‘RF Remote Setup’ to ‘ON’.

!

RF Remote Setup on page 92

3 Pairing the RF adapter and remote control.

!

Pairing the RF adapter and remote control on page 71

En 7


8

4 Setting ‘RECEIVER MAIN’ to ‘RF MODE’ for the remote control unit’s ‘IR/RF SELECT’ setting.

!

Operating this receiver by RF communications on page 71

About using AVNavigator

(included CD-ROM)

The included AVNavigator CD-ROM contains

Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the receiver’s connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be completed easily simply by following the instructions on the screen to make the connections and settings.

There are also other features enabling easy use of various functions, including an Interactive

Manual that operates in association with the receiver, updating of various types of software, and MCACC Application that lets you check the

MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs.

Installing AVNavigator

1 Load the included AVNavigator

CD-ROM into your computer’s CD drive.

!

The installation screen is displayed. Proceed to step 2.

!

If the installation screen does not appear, double-click on the CD-ROM icon then start the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe).

2 Follow the instructions on the screen to install.

When “Finish” is selected, installation is completed.

3 Remove the included AVNavigator

CD-ROM from the computer’s CD drive.

Handling the CD-ROM

Operating Environment

!

This CD-ROM can be used with Microsoft ®

Windows ® XP/Vista/7.

!

A browser is at times used for AVNavigator functions. The supported browser is Microsoft

Internet Explorer 6, 7 and 8. With other browsers, some functions may be limited or the display may not appear properly.

Also, even with a supported browser, depending on the browser’s settings, some functions may be limited and the display may not appear properly.

Precautions For Use

!

This CD-ROM is for use with a personal computer. It cannot be used with a DVD player or music CD player. Attempting to play this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music

CD player can damage speakers or cause impaired hearing due to the large volume.

License

!

Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its use.

Also agree to the “License Agreement” displayed when installing AVNavigator.

Terms of Use

!

Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM belongs to PIONEER CORPORATION.

Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast, public transmission, translation, sales, lending or other such matters that go beyond the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as defined by Copyright Law may be subject to punitive actions. Permission to use this

CD-ROM is granted under license by PIONEER

CORPORATION.

General Disclaimer

!

PIONEER CORPORATION does not guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM with respect to personal computers using any of the applicable OS. In addition, PIONEER

CORPORATION is not liable for any damages incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM and is not responsible for any compensation.

The names of private corporations, products and other entities described herein are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective firms.

Using AVNavigator

1 Click [AVNavigator] on the desktop to launch AVNavigator.

AVNavigator is launched and Wiring Navi starts up. The language selection screen appears. Follow the instructions on the screen to make the connections and automatic settings.

Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the first time AVNavigator is launched.

2 Select and use the desired function.

AVNavigator includes the following functions:

!

Wiring Navi – Guides you through connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be made easily.

!

Interactive Manual – Automatically displays the pages explaining the functions that have been operated on the receiver. It is also possible to operate the receiver from the

Interactive Manual.

!

Glossary – Displays glossary pages.

!

MCACC Appli – Displays Advanced

MCACC measurement results vividly on the computer.

There are special operating instructions for MCACC Application. These instructions are included in the AVNavigator

Interactive Manual ’s menus. Refer to them when using MCACC Application.

!

Software Update – Allows various types of software to be updated.

!

Settings – Used to make various

AVNavigator settings.

!

Detection – Used to detect the receiver.

Note

To use the AVNavigator of another model, first uninstall (delete) this receiver’s AVNavigator, then install the AVNavigator of the other model.

Deleting the AVNavigator

You can use the following method to uninstall

(delete) the AVNavigator from your PC.

% Delete from the Control Panel of the

PC.

From the Start menu, click “Program” d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d

“AVNavigator(SC-LX85 or SC-LX75)” d

“Uninstall”.

En

Controls and displays 02

Controls and displays

Remote control


This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.

1

2

3

4

RECEIVER

MAIN

BD

TV

USB iPod

PHONO

SOURCE

ZONE2

DVD

3

MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

DVR HDMI

CD

NET RADIO

HMG ADAPTER

1

OPTION

2 TUNER

MULTI CH

IN VIDEO

INPUT SELECT

CD-R

LIGHT

AUX

5

11

6

7

8

9

10

CH

TV

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

VOL

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET ENTER

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

RETURN

PTY SEARCH

CH LEVEL

THX MPX PQLS MEMORY

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

CH

12

13

14

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:

!

White – Receiver control, TV control

!

Blue – Other controls (See pages 38, 39, 41, 43 and 68.)

1 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch

Switch to perform operations in the main zone,

ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 (page 62).

2 u RECEIVER

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

3 MULTI OPERATION

Use this button to perform multi operations

(page 67).

4 Input function buttons

Press to select control of other components

(page 64).

There are no AUX and CD-R inputs on this receiver, so the AUX and CD-R buttons cannot be used.

5 INPUT SELECT

Use INPUT SELECT c / d to select the input function (page 38).

6 Character display

This display shows information when transmitting control signals. The remote screen’s display differs when operating the receiver by sending infrared signals from the remote control and when operating it by RF two-way communications. For details, see Remote control display on page 10.

7 TV CONTROL buttons

These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV operation selector switch.

8 Receiver setting buttons

Set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER first to access:

!

AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Audio options (page 57).

!

VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Video options (page 59).

!

HOME MENU – Use to access the Home

Menu (pages 34, 36, 54, 80 and 87).

!

RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.

9 i / j / k / l /ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 80) and the

Audio or Video options (page 57 or 59).

10 Receiver Control buttons

Set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER first to access:

!

STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings (page 63).

!

PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase

Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 48).

!

CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel, then use k / l to adjust the level

(page 89).

!

THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode (page 46).

!

PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting

(page 56).

!

AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between

Auto Surround (page 45), Auto Level Control,

Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode (page 46).

!

STEREO – Press to select stereo playback mode (page 45).

!

STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes ( 2 Pro Logic,

Neo:X, etc.) (page 45).

!

ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 46).

!

SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal

(page 47).

!

SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 62).

!

DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display

(page 62).

!

A.ATT

– Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog input signal to prevent distortion

(page 62).

!

SBch – With this receiver, SBch cannot be used.

!

MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets (page 47).

!

HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal (page 62).

11 LIGHT

Press to turn on/off the illumination for the buttons.

!

Press and hold in the LIGHT button for 5 seconds to change the illumination mode 1 or 2. When set to LIGHT MODE 2 (default), the illumination only lights when the remote control LIGHT button is pressed. When switched to LIGHT MODE 1 , the illumination lights whenever buttons are operated.

Setting LIGHT MODE 1 will shorten the service life of the batteries.

12 Remote control operation selector switch

Set to RECEIVER to operate the receiver, TV or

SOURCE to operate the TV or the source device.

When this switch is set to RECEIVER , the receiver can be controlled (used to select the white commands). Also use this switch to set up surround sound.

13 VOL +/–

Use to set the listening volume.

14 MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

En 9


Remote control display

The display lights when a remote control operation is performed, then turns off after 20 seconds if no other operation is performed. When in the Remote Setup mode, the setup is canceled and the display turns off if no operation is performed for 1 minute (page 64).

Remote control display for infrared signal transmission (default)

1 2 3 4 5 6

MAIN IR SOURCE

iPod/USB

7

Remote control display for RF twoway communications

1 2 3 4 5 6

8 9

MAIN RF RCV CTRL

AV RECEIVER

VIDEO

+12.

0dB

1. Adv MCACC

10 11 12

!

This is displayed when an RF adapter is connected to the receiver and paired with the remote control. For details, see Using the RF communications function on page 70.

!

Depending on the communications environment, two-way communications may not work well and the remote control display may not reflect the receiver’s status.

1 Remote control operating zone indicator

This indicates which zone the remote control is currently set to operate. The display indicates the setting of the MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch.

Only when RF two-way communications:

The box display here indicates the communication status between this remote control unit and the receiver.

MAIN (White box with black letters): Twoway communications are established and the receiver’s power is on.

MAIN (Gray box with black letters): Two-way communications are established and the receiver’s power is off.

MAIN (White letters only): Two-way communications are not working well. In this case, the area indicating the receiver’s status (12) is not displayed.

2 Remote control code sending indicator

This appears when signals are sent from the remote control.

3 Remote control code sending mode indicator

This indicates whether remote control codes are being sent by infrared ( IR ) signal or RF communications.

4 Remote control operation indicator

This indicates which operation mode the remote control is currently set to. The display indicates the setting of the remote control operation selector switch.

5 Input function and sending code indicator

This indicates what input function can currently be operated with the remote control. Also, when a button is pressed and its operation code is sent, the name of that code is displayed.

6 Area indicating the remote control’s status

7 Nothing displayed

Nothing is displayed here when the remote control code sending mode is set to IR .

8 Scroll indicators

Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.

9 Receiver input indicator

This indicates the input function currently selected for the receiver’s zone.

10 Receiver display

The same information as on the receiver’s display is displayed here.

11 Master volume display

This indicates the volume of the receiver’s main zone using, as an icon and in decibels

(dB). When the sound is muted, the icon is displayed.

12 Area indicating the receiver’s status

RF adapter

Front

1

Rear

3

2

1 LED

2 SETTING

Use to pairing the RF adapter and remote control (page 71).

3 IR blaster terminals

Connect the IR blaster cable (page 71).

10 En


Remote control


This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.

1

2,3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SOURCE

RCU SETUP

DVD

BDR

DVR BD

SAT

TV CD

USB iPod TUNER

INPUT SELECT

HMG

HDMI

ADPT

OPTION

VIDEO

TV CTRL RECEIVER

INPUT

TV CONTROL

CH VOL

MUTE

LIST TUNE TOOLS

PRESET ENTER PRESET

RETURN iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

HDD DVD

TUNE

THX PHASE CTRL STATUS

TV / DTV MPX PQLS

1

HDMI OUT

2

SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP

4 5 6

CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER

7 8 9

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

ZONE 2

0

ZONE 3

CLASS

ENTER

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

CH

LIGHT

RECEIVER

11

12

13

14

15

16

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:

!

White – Receiver control, TV control

!

Blue – Other controls (See pages 38, 39, 41, 43 and 78.)

1 u RECEIVER


2 MULTI OPERATION

Use this button to perform multi operations

(page 76).

3 RCU SETUP

Use to input the preset code when making remote control settings and to set the remote control mode (page 74).

4 Input function buttons

Press to select control of other components

(page 74).

Use INPUT SELECT c / d to select the input function (page 38).

5 TV CTRL

Set the preset code of your TV’s manufacturer when controlling the TV (page 75).

6 TV CONTROL buttons

These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL button.

7 Receiver setting buttons

Press first to access:

!

AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Audio options (page 57).

!

VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Video options (page 59).

!

HOME MENU – Use to access the Home

Menu (pages 34, 36, 54, 80 and 87).

!

RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.

8 i / j / k / l /ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 80) and the

Audio or Video options (page 57 or 59).

9 Receiver Control buttons

Press first to access:

!

AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between

Auto Surround (page 45), Auto Level Control,

Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode (page 46).

!

STEREO – Press to select stereo playback mode (page 45).

!

STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes ( 2 Pro Logic,

Neo:X, etc.) (page 45).

!

ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 46).

!

THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode (page 46).

!

PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase

Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 48).

!

STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings (page 63).

!

PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting

(page 56).

!

HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal (page 62).

!

SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal

(page 47).

!

MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets (page 47).

!

SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 62).

!

CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel, then use k / l to adjust the level

(page 89).

!

A.ATT

– Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog input signal to prevent distortion

(page 62).

!

DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display

(page 62).

10 MULTI-ZONE select buttons

Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 and

ZONE 3 (page 61).

11 Remote control LED

Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.

12 OPTION

The preset codes of desired devices can be registered in the remote control and button operations can be registered using the learning mode.

13

Switches the remote to control the receiver

(used to select the white commands).

Switch to perform operations in the main zone.

Also use this button to set up surround sound.

14 MASTER VOLUME +/–


15 MUTE


16 LIGHT

Press to turn on/off the illumination for the buttons.

The way the buttons light can be selected from four modes (page 76).

En 11


Display

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

6

AUTO L

SL

C

HDMI

DIGITAL

ANALOG

XL XC

LFE

AUTO SURROUND

STREAM DIRECT

2

THX ADV.SURROUND

STANDARD

SP AB SLEEP

R

SR

XR

MSTR

2

2

DIGITAL PLUS

TrueHD

DTS HD ES 96/24

CD TUNER

DSD PCM

MULTI-ZONE

PHONO iPod

FULL BAND

PQLS ALC ATT

S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO

DVD

BD

TV

DVR

TUNED RDS

STEREO

VIDEO HMG

HDMI

USB

[ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ]

16 17 18 19 20 dB

14 15

21

12

1 Signal indicators

Light to indicate the currently selected input signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input signal automatically (page 47).

2 Program format indicators

Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are being input.

!

L/R – Left front/Right front channel

!

C – Center channel

!

SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel

!

LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)

!

XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above

!

XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag

3 Digital format indicators

Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected.

!

2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital decoding.

!

2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital

Plus decoding.

!

2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding.

!

DTS – Lights with DTS decoding.

!

DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.

En

!

96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.

!

DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream

Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.

!

PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.

!

MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD

Master Audio signals.

4 MULTI-ZONE

Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active

(page 61).

5 FULL BAND

Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on (page 48).

6 Listening mode indicators

!

AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto

Surround feature is switched on (page 45).

!

ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode is selected (page 45).

!

STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure

Direct is selected (page 46).

!

ADV.SURROUND

– Lights when one of the Advanced Surround modes has been selected (page 46).

!

STANDARD – Lights when one of the

Standard Surround modes is switched on

(page 45).

!

THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is selected (page 46).

7 (PHASE CONTROL)

Lights when the Phase Control (page 47) or Full

Band Phase Control (page 48) is switched on.

8 Analog signal indicators

Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal (page 62).

9 PQLS

Lights when the PQLS feature is active (page

56).

10 Tuner indicators

!

TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.

!

STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.

!

MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX .

!

RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received.

11

Lights when the sound is muted.

12 SOUND

Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog

Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features is selected (page 57).

13 Master volume level

Shows the overall volume level.

“ --” indicates the minimum level, and “ +12dB ” indicates the maximum level.

14 Input function indicators

Light to indicate the input function you have selected.

15 Scroll indicators

Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.

16 Speaker indicators

Lights to indicate the current speaker system using SPEAKERS (page 61).

17 SLEEP

Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page

62).

18 Matrix decoding format indicators

!

2 PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2

Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page

45).

19 S.RTRV

Lights when the Auto Sound Retriever function is active (page 57).


Displays various system information.

21 Remote control mode indicator

Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1 .)

(page 92)


Front panel

1

INPUT

SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

2 3

ADVANCED

MCACC FL OFF

4 3

HDMI iPod iPhone iPad

5

MASTER

VOLUME

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

SPEAKERS

MULTI-ZONE

CONTROL ON/OFF iPod iPhone iPad

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STANDARD

SURROUND HOME THX

7

PRESET

HOME MENU

ENTER BAND

PRESET

RETURN

TUNER EDIT

PHONES MCACC

SETUP MIC

TUNE

USB

5V 2.1 A

HDMI 3 INPUT iPod iPhone iPad

15 16 17

1 u STANDBY/ON


2 INPUT SELECTOR dial

Use to select an input function.

3 Indicators

!

ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu

(page 57).

18 19 20 21

!

FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing displayed) is selected with the display’s dimmer adjustment (page 62).

!

HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMIequipped component; lights when the component is connected (page 25).

!

iPod iPhone iPad – Lights to indicate iPod/ iPhone/iPad is connected (page 31).


See Display on page 12.

6

5 Remote sensor

Receives the signals from the remote control

(page 7).

6 MASTER VOLUME dial

7 Front panel controls

To access the front panel controls, catch the sides of the door with your fingers and pull forward.

INPU

SELECTOR

STA

NDB Y/O

N

MASTER

VOLUME

8 AUDIO PARAMETER

Use to access the Audio options (page 57).

9 i / j / k / l (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your

Home Menu . Use TUNE i / j to find radio frequencies and use PRESET k / l to find preset stations (page 41).

10 VIDEO PARAMETER

Use to access the Video options (page 59).

11 SPEAKERS

Use to change the speaker terminal (page 61).

12 MULTI-ZONE controls

If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page

29) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone (page 61).

13 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 39).

14 Listening mode buttons

!

AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –

Switches between Auto Surround (page 45),

Auto Level Control, Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode (page 46).

!

STANDARD SURROUND – Press for

Standard decoding and to switch various modes ( 2 Pro Logic, Neo:X, Stereo etc.)

(page 45).

!

ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page

46).

!

HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode (page 46).

15 HOME MENU

Use to access the Home Menu (pages 34, 36,

54, 80 and 87).

16 RETURN

Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.

17 TUNER controls

!

BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 41).

!

TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i / j , PRESET k / l and ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall (page 41).

18 PHONES jack

Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.

19 MCACC SETUP MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied microphone (page

34).

20 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals

Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad as an audio and video source (page 31), or connect a USB device for audio and photo playback

(page 31).

21 HDMI input connector

Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device (Video camera, etc.) (page 31).

En 13


14

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment

This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.

CAUTION

!

Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.

!

When making connections, also keep the power cords of the devices being connected unplugged from the power outlets.

!

Depending on the device being connected (amplifier, receiver, etc.), the methods of connection and terminal names may differ from the explanations in this manual. Also refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices.

Important

Illustration shows the SC-LX85, however connections for the SC-LX75 are the same except where noted.

Rear panel

SC-LX85

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

IN

1

(DVD)

Y

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

IN

4

(VIDEO) BD IN

CU-RF100

(OUTPUT 5 V

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V

TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

IN

5

(DVD)

IN

6

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

OUT

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

OUT 2

DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN

( DVD

1

)

IN

( CD

2

)

IN 1

( TV/SAT )

IN 2

( DVR/BDR ) (

IN 3

VIDEO )

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN

A

R

IN OUT IN

FRONT

L

CENTER

CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT

(Single)

F WIDE FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK

L

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

En

SC-LX75

IN

1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

(DVD)

Y

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN

2

IN 2

(DVR/

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

4

DVD

IN

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

IN

3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

5

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

SIGNAL

GND

COAXIAL

OUT 2


(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL

IN

(

DVD

1

)

IN

(

CD

2

)

IN

1

(

TV/SAT

)

ASSIGNABLE

IN

2

(

DVR/BDR

) (

IN

3

VIDEO

)

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2


(Single)

F WIDE

RS-232C ANTENNA

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

ADAPTER PORT

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

R

SURROUND

L

AC IN

R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS

IR IN 1

IN 1

OUT

EXTENSION

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

Note

!

The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to

The Input Setup menu on page 36 to change the assignments if other connections are used.

Input function

Input Terminals

Digital Component HDMI

( BD )

IN 5 IN 1

BD

DVD

TV/SAT

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

HDMI 1

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

(front panel)

CD

IN 6

IN 4

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

COAX-1

OPT-1

OPT-2

OPT-3

COAX-2

IN 2

IN 3

!

SC-LX75 only:

The CU-RF100 omni-directional remote control

(separately sold) can be connected to the

RS-232C and EXTENSION terminals. Using the CU-RF100 lets you display the receiver’s display information on the remote control display in your hands and operate it without worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control is pointing.

RS-232C ANTENNA

AM LOOP

IR

OUT

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

IN

IN 2

OUT

EXTENSION

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX) CONTR

Connecting your equipment 03

Connecting the RF adapter

SC-LX85 only

Two-way communications between the receiver and remote control are possible by connecting the included RF adapter to the RS-232C and CU-RF100 terminals on the receiver. For the features of two-way communications and detailed usage instructions, see Using the RF communications function on page 70.

(DVR/

BDR)

IN

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

RF adapter

Determining the speakers’ application

This unit is equipped with speaker terminals for

9 channels, allowing users to select a variety of speaker layouts/usage patterns according to their tastes. The terminals to which the speakers should be connected differ according to the speaker layout/usage pattern. Select one speaker layout/usage pattern before connecting the speakers. For instructions on connections, see Installing your speaker system on page 19.

!

Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels ( L and R ).

!

It is also possible to only connect one of the surround back speakers ( SB ) or neither.

!

If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the

SUBWOOFER 2 terminal. Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.

Important

!

The setting must be made if you use any of the connections shown below other than [A] (see Speaker system setting on page 87).

!

The speakers from which sound is output can be switched according to the speaker layout/usage pattern (sound is not necessarily output from all connected speakers). Use the SPEAKERS button to switch the speakers from which sound is output. For details, see

Switching the speaker terminals on page 61.

[A] 9.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) connection

*Default setting

!

Speaker System setting: 9.1ch FH/FW

L

FHL

FWL

SW 2

SL

FHR

R

FWR

C

SW 1

SBL

SR

SBR

A 9.2 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers ( L / R ), the center speaker

( C ), the left and right front height speakers

( FHL / FHR ), the left and right front wide speakers ( FWL / FWR ), the left and right surround speakers ( SL / SR ), the left and right surround back speakers ( SBL / SBR ), and the subwoofers

( SW 1 / SW 2 ).

It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height speakers and the front wide speakers.

This surround system produces a more true-tolife sound from above.

The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the SPEAKERS button. For details, see Switching the speaker terminals on page 61.

[B] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker

B connection

!

Speaker System setting: 7.1ch + Speaker B

L

FHL

SW 2

C

SW 1

SL

FHR

R

SBL

SR L

SBR

R

Speaker B

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 7.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same connections also allow for 9.2-channel surround sound in the main zone when not using the B speakers.


En 15


[C] 7.2 channel surround system & Front

Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

!

Speaker System setting: 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp

Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 7.2-channel surround sound.

Front Bi-Amp

L

SW 2

C

SW 1

SL

R

SBL

SR

SBR

[D] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

!

Speaker System setting: 7.1ch + ZONE 2

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 7.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

This speaker layout/usage pattern provides

7.2-channel playback using the surround back channels in the main zone. To achieve 7.2-channel playback using the front height and front wide channels with ZONE 2 connections, see

[E].

L

SW 2

R

C

SW 1

Main zone

SR

SBR

[E] 7.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) & ZONE 2 connection

(Multi Zone)

!

Speaker System setting:

7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 7.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

This speaker layout/usage pattern provides

7.2-channel playback using the front height and front wide channels in the main zone. To achieve 7.2-channel playback using the surround back channels with ZONE 2 connections, see [D].

It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height speakers and the front wide speakers.


SL

SBL

Sub zone

FHL

FHR

R

Main zone

FWR

R

L

ZONE 2 L

SW 2

C

SW 1

FWL

[F] 5.2 channel surround system & Front

Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi

Zone)

!


5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2.

(The selection of input devices is limited.)

Front Bi-Amp

Main zone

R

L

SW 2

C

SW 1

SL

ZONE 2 L

SR

R

Sub zone

SR

SL

Sub zone

R

ZONE 2 L

16 En


[G] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE

2/ZONE 3 connection (Multi Zone)

!

Speaker System setting: 5.1ch + ZONE 2+3

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2 and ZONE3. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

L

Speaker B Bi-Amp

R

L

R

C

SW 1

SW 2

R

Main zone

SR

L

SL

SW 2

C

SW 1

SL

SR

R

L

R

L ZONE 3

Sub zone

ZONE 2

[H] 5.2 channel surround system & Speaker

B Bi-amping connection

SC-LX85 only

!


5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The B speakers can be biamped to achieve high quality sound.


[I] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Surround Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

SC-LX85 only

!


5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp

Bi-amping connection of the front and surround speakers for high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround sound.

Front Bi-Amp

L

SW 2

SL

C

SW 1

R

SR

Surround Bi-Amp

[J] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Center Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

SC-LX85 only

!

Speaker System setting: 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp

Bi-amping connection of the front and center speakers for high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround sound.

Front Bi-Amp

Center

Bi-Amp

L

SW 2

C

SW 1

SL

R

Other speaker connections

SR

!

Your favorite speaker connections can be selected even if you have fewer than 5.2 speakers (except front left/right speakers).

!

When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency component is played from the front speakers, so the speakers could be damaged.)

!

After connecting, be sure to conduct the

Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto

MCACC) on page 34.

Placing the speakers

Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect.

FHL

L

SW 2 SW 1

C

FHR

R

FWL

60

30 30

60

FWR

120 120

SL

60

SR

SBL SB SBR

!

Place the surround speakers at 120º from the center. If you, (1) use the surround back speaker, and, (2) don’t use the front height speakers / front wide speakers, we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside you.

!

If you intend to connect only one surround back speaker, place it directly behind you.

!

Place the left and right front height speakers at least one meter directly above the left and right front speakers.

THX speaker system setup

If you are using a THX certified subwoofer, use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.

See also THX Audio Setting on page 89 to make the settings that will give you the best sound experience when using the Home THX modes

(page 46).

En 17


18

Some tips for improving sound quality

Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.

!

The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.

Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re listening to them.

Putting the speakers on the floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.

!

For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.

!

If you’re going to place speakers around your

CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a sufficient distance from your

CRT TV.

!

If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower angle.

!

Place the center speaker above or below the

TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.

!

It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.

!

Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and tilted slightly downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-

Audio, the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.

!

Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.

En

Connecting the speakers

Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal.

Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.

CAUTION

!

These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS

LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts.

!

Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If core wires touch each other or come in contact with the rear panel or the metal parts of other speaker terminals, the protective circuit may be activated, setting the power to the standby mode.

Bare wire connections

CAUTION

Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.

1 Twist exposed wire strands together.

2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.

3 Tighten terminal.

1 2 3

10 mm

Note

!

Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers.

!

Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer.

It is not possible to connect using speaker cables.

!

If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the

SUBWOOFER 2 terminal. Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.

Bi-amping your speakers

Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.

High

Low

Bi-amp compatible speaker

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

CU-RF100

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L

CAUTION

!

Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.

!

If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for biamping. Doing so may damage your speakers.

Bi-wiring your speakers

Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-amping.

!

With these connections, the Speaker System setting makes no difference.

CAUTION

!

Don’t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way.

!

When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-amping shown above.

% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.


Installing your speaker system

At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).

[A] 9.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) connection

!

If necessary, select ‘ 9.1ch FH/FW ’ from the Speaker System menu.

See on page 87 to do this.

!

When only connecting one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.

Front wide right

Front height right Front height left

Front wide left

[B] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection

!

Select ‘ 7.1ch + Speaker B ’ from the Speaker System menu.


!


Speaker B - right


Speaker B - left

Front right

Subwoofer 1

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Center Subwoofer 2

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Front left

Front right

Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2

Front left

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN 4

(VIDEO)

BD IN

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

IN 5

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE


(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN

1

( DVD )

IN

( CD

2

)

IN

1

( TV/SAT )

IN

2

( DVR/BDR ) (

IN

3

VIDEO )

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

ADAPTER PORT

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN


L

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

R

MULTI CH IN

SUBWOOFER

R

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

IN

(DVR/

BDR)

2

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

IN

1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

(DVD)

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN

2

IN 4

(VIDEO)

BD IN

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

IN 5

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO

SIGNAL

GND

COAXIAL

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

(

IN 1

DVD

DC OUTPUT

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

IN 2

)

IN 1

( TV/SAT )

IN 2

( DVR/BDR (

IN 3

VIDEO )

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN


L

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

CU-RF100

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

Surround right Surround back right Surround back left Surround left

Surround right

Surround back right Surround back left

Surround left

En 19


[C] 7.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

!

Select ‘ 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp ’ from the Speaker System menu.


!



Front right


Front left


High High

Low

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Low

[D] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back) & ZONE 2 connection

(Multi Zone)

!

Select ‘ 7.1ch + ZONE 2 ’ from the Speaker System menu.


!


ZONE 2 - right

Front right


Front left

ZONE 2 - left

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN

(DVR/

BDR)

IN 3

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

IN 4

(VIDEO)

DVD

IN

BD IN

IN 5

(DVD)

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

DC OUTPUT

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

DVD

)

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

IN

(

CD

2

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

(

TV/SAT

)

IN 2

(

DVR/BDR

IN 3

(

VIDEO

ADAPTER PORT

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN


L

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

IN

(VIDEO)

BD IN

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

IN

(DVD)

IN OUT IN

A

R

FRONT

IN

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

COAXIAL

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

(

IN

DVD

1

)

DC OUTPUT

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN

( CD

2

)

IN 1

( TV/SAT )

IN 2

( DVR/BDR

IN 3

( VIDEO

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

L

CENTER

CD IN

FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

AC IN


L

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

SUBWOOFER

R

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

Surround right


Surround left

Surround right


Surround left

20 En


[E] 7.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

!

Select ‘ 7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2 ’ from the Speaker System menu.


Front wide right


Front wide left

Center

Front left

[F] 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

!

Select ‘ 5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2 ’ from the Speaker System menu.



Front right


Front left


High High

Low Low

Front right

Subwoofer 1

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Subwoofer 2

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

IN

(DVR/

BDR)

2

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

IN

1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN

2

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

IN

(VIDEO)

DVD

IN

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

IN

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

IN

(DVR/BDR)

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

COAXIAL

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

DC OUTPUT

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN 1

(

DVD

)

IN

(

CD

2

)

IN 1

(

TV/SAT

)

IN 2

(

DVR/BDR

) (

IN 3

VIDEO

)

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

AC IN


L

SUBWOOFER

R

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

CU-RF100

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN 2

BDR)

IN 3

(VIDEO)

IN 4

(VIDEO)

BD IN

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

IN 5

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE


(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

(

IN

1

DVD

IN

2

)

IN

1

( TV/SAT )

IN

2

( DVR/BDR (

IN

3

VIDEO )

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

ADAPTER PORT

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN


L

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

Surround right ZONE 2 - right ZONE 2 - left Surround left

Surround right ZONE 2 - right ZONE 2 - left Surround left

En 21


[G] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2/ZONE 3 connection (Multi

Zone)

!

Select ‘ 5.1ch + ZONE 2+3 ’ from the Speaker System menu.


ZONE 3 - right

Front right


Front left

ZONE 3 - left

[H] 5.2 channel surround system & Speaker B Bi-amping connection

SC-LX85 only

!

Select ‘ 5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp ’ from the Speaker System menu.


Front right


Front left

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN

(DVR/

BDR) ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

IN

(VIDEO)

DVD

IN

IN 3

(VIDEO)

BD IN

IN

(DVD)

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO

SIGNAL

GND

COAXIAL

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

(

IN

DVD

1

)

DC OUTPUT

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

IN

( CD

2

)

IN 1

( TV/SAT )

IN 2

( DVR/BDR

IN 3

( VIDEO

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN


L

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

Surround right

ZONE 2 - right ZONE 2 - left

Surround left

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN 4

(VIDEO)

BD IN

IN 5

(DVD)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE


(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN

1

( DVD )

IN

( CD

2

)

IN

1

TV/SAT )

IN

2

( DVR/BDR )

IN

3

( VIDEO )

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

ADAPTER PORT

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN


L

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

R

MULTI CH IN

SUBWOOFER

R

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

Surround right

High

Low


Speaker B left


Speaker B right

High

Low

Surround left

22 En

[I] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Surround Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

SC-LX85 only

!

Select ‘ 5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp ’ from the Speaker System menu.



Front right


Front left


High High

Low Low

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

(DVD)

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN

(VIDEO)

BD IN

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

IN

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

IN

(DVR/BDR)

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

L

CENTER

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO

SIGNAL

GND

AUDIO

COAXIAL

R

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

DC OUTPUT

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN 1

( DVD )

L

IN

( CD

2

)

IN 1

( TV/SAT )

IN 2

( DVR/BDR ) (

IN 3

VIDEO )

R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN


L

SUBWOOFER

R

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

CU-RF100

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

High


Surround left

High

Low Low


Surround right


[J] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Center Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

SC-LX85 only

!

Select ‘ 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp ’ from the Speaker System menu.



Front right


Center


Front left

Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2

High High High

Low

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Low

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Low

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN

2

(DVR/

BDR) ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

BD IN

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

COAXIAL

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

DC OUTPUT

IN 1

(

DVD

)

IN 2

(

CD

)

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

(

TV/SAT

IN 2

(

DVR/BDR

)

IN 3

(

VIDEO

)

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

ADAPTER PORT

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN


L

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

SUBWOOFER

R

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2

OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

Surround right Surround left

En 23


24

About the audio connection

Types of cables and

terminals

HDMI

Transferable audio

signals

HD audio

Terminal for connection with source device

HDMI IN

Terminal for connection with TV monitor

HDMI OUT

Y P

B

P

R

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Y P

B

P

R

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

Digital (Coaxial) Conventional digital audio

VIDEO IN

Video signals can be output

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

Digital (Optical)

RCA (Analog)

( White / Red )

Conventional analog audio

!

With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be transferred in high quality over a single cable.

About the video converter

The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR

VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this video source.

If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 36), the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, then composite (in that order).

Note

!

If the video signal does not appear on your

TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion

(in Setting the Video options on page 59) OFF .

!

The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p,

720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.

!

Only signals with an input resolution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the composite

MONITOR OUT terminals.

!

For optimal video performance, THX recommends switching Digital Video

Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 59) OFF .

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.

Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

About HDMI

The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.

This receiver incorporates High-Definition

Multimedia Interface (HDMI ® ) technology.

This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections.

!

Digital transfer of uncompressed video

(contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24,

1080p/60, etc.))

!

3D signal transfer

!

Deep Color signal transfer

!

x.v.Color signal transfer

!

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

!

Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels

!

Input of the following digital audio formats:

— Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master

Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio),

DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video

CD, Super VCD

!

Synchronized operation with components using the Control with HDMI function (see

Control with HDMI function on page 54)

Note

!

An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital

Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVI d HDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.

!

If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an

HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.

!

Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.

!

This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital

Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master

Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.

!

Use a High Speed HDMI ® cable. If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI ® cable is used, it may not work properly.

!

When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is connected, it may not operate properly.

!

Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.

!

HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.

!

Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.

HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition

Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the

United States and other countries.

“x.v.Color” and marks of Sony Corporation.

are trade-

En


Connecting your TV and playback components

Connecting using HDMI

If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.

If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control with HDMI functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 54).

Other HDMI/DVIequipped component

HDMI/DVI-compatible

Blu-ray Disc player

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

HDMI OUT HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL R

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG L

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no HDMI output) to the receiver.

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

DVD player, etc.

HDMI IN

(ARC)

R

Select one

AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT

ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

Select one

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y P

B

P R

(ARC)

This connection is required in order to listen to the sound of the

TV over the receiver.

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

1

(DVD)

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN 4

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

BD IN

TV/SAT

IN

VIDEO

IN

IN 5

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

DC OUTPUT

IN

( DVD

1

)

IN

( CD

2

)

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

LAN

(10/100)

IN

1

( TV/SAT ) (

ASSIGNABLE

IN

2

DVR/BDR ) (

IN

3

VIDEO )

ADAPTE

(OUTPU

0.1 A

OU

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE FRONT CENT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

SUBWO

R

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

!

When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal, switch the

HDMI output setting to HDMI OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL . See Switching the HDMI output on page

62.

!

For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 25).

!

If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables.

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC

(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 54).

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

1

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN 4

(VIDEO)

BD IN

IN 5

(DVD)

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE


5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

IN

( DVD

1

)

IN

( CD

2

)

LAN

(10/100)

IN

1

( TV/SAT ) (

ASSIGNABLE

IN

2

DVR/BDR ) (

IN

3

VIDEO )

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

PHONO

IN

CD IN

FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2


(Single)


L

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

!

If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables (page 25).

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC

(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 54).

!

If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

En 25


Connecting your TV with no HDMI input

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the receiver.

!

With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI cable. Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect the receiver and player.

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources

This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 36).

HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.

DVD player, etc.

TV

Select one

Y

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

P

B

P

R

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y P B

Select one

VIDEO OUT

P R

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

Select one

DIGITAL OUT


AUDIO OUT

ANALOG L

R

AUDIO IN

ANALOG L

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

Select one

DIGITAL OUT


AUDIO OUT

ANALOG L

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

IN

1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN

2

IN 2

(DVR/

IN 4

(VIDEO)

BD IN

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

IN

3

IN 5

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

OUT

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO

SIGNAL

GND

COAXIAL

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE


(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN 1

(

DVD

)

IN

(

CD

2

)

IN 1

(

TV/SAT

)

IN 2

(

DVR/BDR

)

IN 3

(

VIDEO

)

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

F WIDE

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR B

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI C

SURROUND

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

26

!

Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to input video signals.

Depending on the video component, it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI and other methods simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information.

!

If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables (page 25).

!

If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

En

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

IN

1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN

2

IN

(DVR/

BDR)

IN 4

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

IN 5

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

IN

( DVD

1

)

DC OUTPUT

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN

( CD

2

)

IN 1

( TV/SAT )

IN 2

( DVR/BDR ) (

IN 3

VIDEO )

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

F WIDE

AC IN

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK

L

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

IN 1

CU-RF100

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

!

In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only) (page 62).

!

If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 25).


Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box

Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

STB

Connecting other audio components

This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 36).

Turntable MD, DAT, etc.

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

R

Select one

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG L

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

R

AUDIO OUT

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

1

(DVD)

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN 4

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

BD IN

DVD

IN

TV/SAT

IN

VIDEO

IN

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

IN 5

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

IN

( DVD

1

)

DC OUTPUT

IN

( CD

2

)

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

LAN

(10/100)

ASSIGNABLE

IN

1

( TV/SAT )

IN

2

( DVR/BDR ) (

IN

3

VIDEO )

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

F WIDE FRONT

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN

CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK

L

R

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

!

If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI IN 1 or IN 2 terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI

(see Connecting using HDMI on page 25).

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

IN

1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN

2

IN

2

(DVR/

IN 4

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

IN 5

(DVD)

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE


(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

IN 1

(

DVD

)

IN

(

CD

2

)

IN 1

(

TV/SAT

)

IN 2

(

DVR/BDR

)

IN 3

(

VIDEO

)

PHONO

IN CD IN FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2

F WIDE

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK

L

R

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

CU-RF100 OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

!

If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs instead.

!

You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s digital out jack.

En 27


Connecting the multichannel analog inputs

SC-LX85 only

For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending on whether your player supports surround back channels). Make sure that the player is set to output multichannel analog audio.

DVD player, etc.

Connecting additional amplifiers

This receiver has more than enough power for any home use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers.

R

L

Front channel amplifier

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

R

FRONT

OUTPUT

L

CENTER

OUTPUT

R

SURROUND

OUTPUT

L

SURROUND BACK

OUTPUT

R L

IN

2

IN 4

(VIDEO)

BD IN

IN 5

(DVD)

IN 6

(DVR/BDR)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

MONITOR

OUT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE


(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN 1

( DVD)

IN 2

( CD)

IN 1

( TV/SAT)

IN 2

( DVR/BDR)

IN 3

( VIDEO)

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUT IN

PHONO

IN

CD IN

FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2


(Single)


L

A

R

FRONT

L

CENTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

UNBAL 75

SPEAKERS

1

UT

ONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

!

If there is a single surround back output, connect it to the SURR BACK L jack on this receiver.

!

To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.

!

The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Speaker system setting on page 87.

!

The audio signal input to MULTI CH IN cannot be downmixed.

Center channel amplifier (mono)

R

L

R)

OUT 1

(CONTROL)

VIDEO COAXIAL

NITOR

UT

SIGNAL

GND

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

IN

( DVD

1

)

DC OUTPUT

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN

( CD

2

)

IN

1

( TV/SAT )

IN

2

( DVR/BDR ) (

IN

3

VIDEO )

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

Surround channel amplifier

AC IN

ONO

IN CD IN

FRONT

1

SUBWOOFER

2


(Single)


L

NTER

AUDIO

R

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

ANALOG

INPUT

L

R

R

L

Front height channel amplifier

Front wide channel amplifier

ANALOG

INPUT

L

R

ANALOG

INPUT

Surround back channel amplifier

Powered subwoofer 2

Powered subwoofer 1

!

If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 85) to

LARGE .

!

You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In this case plug the amplifier into the left ( SURROUND BACK L (Single) ) terminal only.

!

The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Speaker system setting on page 87.

!

If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal. Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.

!

To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the speaker system to OFF , or simply disconnect any speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.

28 En


Connecting AM/FM antennas

Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality, connect external antennas

(see Connecting external antennas on page 29).

5

1

FM UNBAL 75

2

3

4

5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the

FM antenna socket.

For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.

Connecting external antennas

To improve FM reception, connect an external

FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W .

75 Ω coaxial cable a b c

1 Pull off the protective shields of both

AM antenna wires.

2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.

3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.

To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow ( fig. a ) then clip the loop onto the stand ( fig. b ).

!

If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws ( fig. c ) before clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.

4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception.

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the supplied

AM loop antenna.

For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.

Outdoor antenna

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

Indoor antenna

(vinyl-coated wire)

5 m to 6 m

MULTI-ZONE setup

This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-ZONE connections.

Different sources can be playing in three zones at the same time or, depending on your needs, the same source can also be used. The main and sub zones have independent power (the main zone power can be off while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls.

Making MULTI-ZONE connections

It is possible to make these connections if you have a separate TV and speakers for your primary ( ZONE 2 ) sub zone, and a separate TV and a separate amplifier (and speakers) for your secondary ( ZONE 3 ) sub zone. You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals

(ZONE 2) on page 29 for your primary sub zone.

There are two primary sub zone setups possible with this system. Choose whichever works best for you.

MULTI-ZONE listening options

The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:

Sub

Zone

Input functions available

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVD , TV/SAT , DVR/BDR , VIDEO ,

HOME MEDIA GALLERY , iPod/USB ,

CD , TUNER , ADAPTER PORT

(Outputs analog audio, composite video and component video (SC-LX85 only).)

DVD , TV/SAT , DVR/BDR , VIDEO ,

HOME MEDIA GALLERY , iPod/USB ,

CD , TUNER , ADAPTER PORT

(Outputs analog audio, composite video.)

It is not possible to down-convert the audio and video input signals from the HDMI input terminals, digital input terminals ( OPTICAL and

COAXIAL ) and the COMPONENT VIDEO input terminals and output them to ZONE 2/ZONE 3.

Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)

1 Connect a separate amplifier to the

AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.

2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO

ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver.

SC-LX85 only:

!

COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images.

!

The GUI screen is not displayed if only the

COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected.

Sub zone ( ZONE 2 ) Main zone

IN

(VIDEO)

VIDEO IN

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

IN

1

IN

2

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN

BD IN

R

AUDIO IN

L

RS-232C

CU-RF100

(OUTPUT 5 V

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

A

R

MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)

Either the surround back or the front wide speaker terminals can be used as the speaker terminals for ZONE 2. For details, see

Determining the speakers’ application on page

15.

En 29


1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back or front wide speaker terminals.



SC-LX85 only:

!

COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images.

!

The GUI screen is not displayed if only the

COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected.

To use the front wide speaker terminals for

ZONE 2:


VIDEO IN

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

IN

1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN

DC OUTPUT

IN

(VID

SIGNABLE

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN

CD

2

)

IN

1

(

TV/SAT

)

IN

2

)

IN

3

(

VIDEO

)

ADA

(O

IN 2

(DVR/

IN 3

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

OUT

2

ZONE 3

OUT F WIDE FRONT

L R

RS-232C

L

CU-RF100

(OUTPUT 5 V

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

150 mA MAX)

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT

TOTAL 15

12 V TR

R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE /

B

L

To use the surround back speaker terminals for

ZONE 2:


L

VIDEO IN

R

HDMI

IN 1 IN 2

AC IN

IN

(VID

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

(DVR/

IN 3

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

OUT ACK

ZONE 3

OUT

L

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

R

H IN

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)

CU-RF100

(OUTPUT 5 V

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

150 mA MAX)

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT

TOTAL 15

12 V TR

Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup

(ZONE 3)

1 Connect a separate amplifier to the

AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT jacks on this receiver.





VIDEO IN

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P P

R

IN 2

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

IN 4

(VIDEO)

DVD

IN

BD IN

TV/SAT V

IN

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

R

AUDIO IN

L

CU-RF100

(OUTPUT 5 V

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 3)

You must select 5.1ch + ZONE 2+3 in Speaker system setting on page 87 to use this setup.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front wide speaker terminals.





VIDEO IN

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN

IN

HDMI

IN 1 IN 2

GNABLE

) (

IN

CD

2

)

(OUTPUT

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

(

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

2

DVD T

IN 1

TV/SAT ) (

IN 2

DVR/BDR )

IN 3

VIDEO

F WIDE

)

AD

FRONT

L R

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

L R

CU-RF100

(OUTPUT 5 V

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKER

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

Connecting to the network through LAN interface

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations. To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP

(Internet Service Provider) beforehand.

When connected in this way, you can play audio files stored on the components on the network, including your computer, using HOME MEDIA

GALLERY inputs.

BLE


(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

IN

(

DVD

1

)

IN

(

CD

2

)

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

(

TV/SAT

)

IN 2

(

DVR/BDR

)

IN 3

(

VIDEO

)

OFER 2 F WIDE FRO

Internet

Modem

GHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

LAN

3 2 1

Router

WAN

LAN cable

(sold separately) to LAN port

PC

Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher).

Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. For details, see

Network Setup menu on page 89.

30 En


LAN terminal specifications

!

LAN terminal : Ethernet jack

(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Note

!

Refer to the operation manual of the equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method may differ depending on your Internet environment.

!

When using a broadband Internet connection, a contract with an Internet service provider is required. For more details, contact your nearest Internet service provider.

Important

!

Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth

ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause damage or faulty contact.

% Switch the receiver into standby and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the

ADAPTER PORT.

!

For instructions on playing the Bluetooth wireless technology device, see Pairing the

Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device on page 43.

Connecting optional Bluetooth

ADAPTER

When the Bluetooth ® ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or

AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a product equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly.

!

The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device must support A2DP profiles.

!

Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

Bluetooth ® ADAPTER

Connecting an iPod

This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.

iPod iPhone iPad

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

ADVANCED

SURROUND

USB

5V 2.1 A iPod iPhone iPad

STANDARD

SURROUND

HDMI 3 INPUT

HOME THX iPod

E


(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN 1

DVD )

IN

( CD

2

)

IN 1

( TV/SAT )

IN 2

( DVR/BDR ) (

IN 3

VIDEO )

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

AC IN iPod cable

(supplied)

MENU

ER 2

T

L R


L

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

R

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

L R

SURROUND BACK

A

L

(Single)







% Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

!

It is also possible to connect using the cable included with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view pictures via the receiver.

!

For the cable connection, also refer to the operating instructions for your iPod.

!

For instructions on playing the iPod, see

Playing an iPod on page 38.

% Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the

USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

!

This receiver does not support a USB hub.

!

For instructions on playing the USB device, see Playing a USB device on page 39.

Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input

Connecting a USB device

It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver. It is also possible to connect a USB keyboard

(US-international layout) to the receiver to enter text in the following GUI screens.

!

Change the input name in the Input Setup menu (page 36).

!

Add names to radio station presets (page 42).

iPod iPhone iPad

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STANDARD

SURROUND HOME THX

USB


HDMI 3 INPUT iPod iPhone iPad

DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STANDARD

SURROUND

USB


HDMI 3 INPUT

USB mass storage device

USB keyboard

Video camera (etc.)

Connecting to a wireless LAN

Wireless connection to the network is possible through a wireless LAN connection. Use the

AS-WL300 for connection.

!

Use only the furnished accessory connecting cable.

!

For instructions on setting the wireless LAN converter, see Network Setup menu on page

89.

En 31


2

ABLE

IN

1

( DVD )

DC OUTPUT

(OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN

( CD

2

)

IN

1

( TV/SAT )

IN

2

( DVR/BDR )

IN

3

( VIDEO )

ADAPTER PORT

(OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX)

OUT

OOFER 2 F WIDE FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR

GHT

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT WIDE / B

L

SUBWOOFER

R

MULTI

SURROUND

Internet

Modem

Router

WAN

DC 5V Ethernet WPS


Connecting an IR receiver

If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver.

!

Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.

!

Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.

!

If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.

1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR

IN jack on the rear of this receiver.

Closet or shelving unit

Pioneer component

Non-Pioneer component

CONTROL

IN OUT

IR

IN

IN 2

(DVR/

BDR)

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

IN 1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN

1

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN 2

IN 4

(VIDEO)

BD IN

IN 5

(DVD)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

IN IN

DVR/

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

A

R

FRONT

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor

Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks which can be used to link components together so that you can use just the remote sensor of one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component.

!

If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see page

74.

!

If you have connected a remote control to the

CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.

IR receiver

2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.

Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.

!

If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page

32 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.

ASSIGNABLE

Y

IN 1

(DVD)

IN

1

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

B

P

R

IN

2

IN

2

(DVR/

IN 4

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

DVD

IN

IN 3

(VIDEO)

MONITOR

OUT

BD IN

TV/SAT

IN

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

CU-RF100

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

2

CONTROL

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

IN OUT

CONTROL

IN

CONTROL

OUT

Important

!

Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you also have at least one set of analog audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes.

1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of.

When you want to control any component in the chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the corresponding remote control.

2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.

3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many components as you have.

32 En

Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger

You can connect components in your system

(such as a screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input function.

However, you must specify which input functions switch on the trigger using the The Input

Setup menu on page 36. Note that this will only work with components that have a standby mode.

12 V TRIGGER

INPUT

Note

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

CU-RF100

(OUTPUT 5 V

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

IR IN 1

FM UNBAL 75

IN 1

OUT

150 mA MAX)

SPEAKERS

IN 2 OUT

CONTROL

2

(OUTPUT 12 V


12 V TRIGGER

% Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to the 12 V trigger of another component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.

After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on page 36.

!

It is also possible to have the component switch not when the input function is switched, but when HDMI OUT is switched.

For details, see HDMI Setup on page 54.

Plugging in the receiver

Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.

CAUTION

!

Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables.

The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest

Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement.

!

Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit.

!

Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below.

!

The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on vacation.

!

Make sure the blue u STANDBY/ON light has gone out before unplugging.

1 Plug the supplied power cord into the

AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.

2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.

!

After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process.

The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.

When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF , you can skip this process. For details about the Control with HDMI feature, see Control with HDMI function on page 54.


En 33

04 Basic Setup

34

Basic Setup

About remote control operation

Important

!

The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC-LX85 and SC-LX75. For the SC-LX85’s remote control, set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER .

For the SC-LX75’s remote control, press the

button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)

The language used on the Graphical User

Interface screen can be changed.

!

The explanations in these operating instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen.

1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i / j / k / l and

ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home

Menu.

4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the

System Setup menu.

5 Select the desired language.

6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language.

The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically.

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full

Auto MCACC)

The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided with your system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room.

By performing the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure, the frequency-phase characteristics of the connected speakers are also calibrated.

Once the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed, the Full Band Phase Control function is automatically turned on (page 48).

Important

!

Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup.

!

Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.

!

Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the headphones should be disconnected.

CAUTION

!

The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC

Setup are output at high volume.

THX ®

!

THX is a trademark of THX Ltd. which is registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.


Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC

SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.

MULTI-ZONE


DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

PHONES MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB


Microphone

Tripod

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.

Install the microphone on a stable floor.

Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make accurate measurement impossible:

!

Sofas or other soft surfaces.

!

High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.

The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Speaker System

EQ Type

MCACC

THX Speaker

: 9.1ch FH/FW

: SYMMETRY

: M1.MEMORY 1

: NO

START

Exit Return

!

If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.

3 Select the parameters you want to set.

!

When data measurement is taken, the reverb characteristics data (both before- and after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.

!

When measurement is taken of the reverb characteristics data other than SYMMETRY , the data are not measured after the correction. If you will need to measure after correcting data, take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the

Manual MCACC setup (page 82).

If the speakers are connected using any setup other than 9.1ch FH/FW , be sure to set

Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC

Setup. See Speaker system setting on page 87.

!

Speaker System – Shows the current settings. When this is selected and ENTER is pressed, the speaker system selection screen appears. Select the proper speaker system, then press RETURN to return.

If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through

Speaker system setting on page 87 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.

En

Basic Setup 04

!

EQ Type – This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted.

!

MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 86).

!

THX Speaker – Select YES when using THX speakers (all speakers other than the front speakers are set to SMALL ). In other cases, leave at NO .

4 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then select START.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to a comfortable volume level.

6 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the speaker configuration in the

GUI screen.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.

If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘ OK ’ and press ENTER in step 7.

!

With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise!

or Check microphone.

), select RETRY after checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto

MCACC Setup on page 35) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.


A/V RECEIVER

Now Analyzing... 2/10

Environment Check

Ambient Noise

Microphone

Speaker YES/NO :

: OK

:

Exit

10

L

FHL

C

FHR

R

SR

SBR :

SBL

:

:

:

:

:

:

SL

SW

:

:

:

OK


YES

YES

A/V RECEIVER

Cancel YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

RETRY

Exit Return

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.

!

If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i / j to select the speaker and k / l to change the setting and continue.

!

If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase

(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.),

Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

If is displayed, the speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.

— If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly. After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select

GO NEXT and continue.

7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press

ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings.

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.

8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto

MCACC Setup.

The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC

Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using The

Advanced MCACC menu on page 80 or The

System Setup and Other Setup menus on page

87.

!

Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 87.

!

The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

!

If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

Problems when using the Auto

MCACC Setup

If the room environment is not optimal for the

Auto MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them.

!

Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.

En 35

04 Basic Setup

The Input Setup menu

You only need to make settings in the

Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings (see Input function default and possible settings on page 36). In this case, you need to tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you’ve connected.




2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the

Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the


4.System Setup

A/V RECEIVER a.Manual SP Setup b. Input Setup c. OSD Language d. Network Setup e. HDMI Setup f. Other Setup 4b.Input Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Exit

Input

Input Name

Input Skip

Digital In

HDMI Input

Component In

12V Trigger1

12V Trigger2

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

DVD

Rename

OFF

Input-5

In-1

OFF

OFF

Exit Return

4 Select the input function that you want to set up.

The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as

DVD or BD ) which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote control.

5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your component.

For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s Digital In setting from COAX-1

(default) to the optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering ( OPT-1 to OPT-2 ) corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the receiver.

6 When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for other inputs.

There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks:

!

Input Name – You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification. Select

Rename to do so, or Default to return to the system default.

!

Input Skip – When set to ON , that input is skipped when selecting the input using

INPUT SELECT . ( DVD and other inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons.)

!

12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a component to one of the 12 volt triggers

(see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 33), select

MAIN , ZONE 2 , ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding trigger setting to switch it on automatically along with the (main or sub) zone specified.

— Devices connected to 12 volt triggers can be associated with HDMI OUT switching.

For details, see HDMI Setup on page 54.

7 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the System Setup menu.

Input function default and possible settings

The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions. If you have connected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu on page 36 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots ( k ) indicate possible assignments.

Input function

BD

DVD

TV/SAT

DVR/BDR

VIDEO

HDMI 1

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

(front panel)

HOME

MEDIA GAL-

LERY iPod/USB

Input Terminals

HDMI Digital Component

( BD )

IN 5 COAX-1 IN 1 k

<a>

IN 6

IN 4

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

OPT-1

OPT-2

OPT-3 k

IN 2

IN 3

CD COAX-2

TUNER

ADAPTER

PORT

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

 k a With with HDMI set to ON , assignments cannot be made (see Control with HDMI function on page 54).

b SC-LX85 only

Operation Mode Setup

This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings.

One of two settings can be selected for the

Operation Mode : Expert and Basic .




2 Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the Operation Mode setting you want.

!

Expert (default) – Users can set all the functions by themselves.

!

Basic – The number of operable functions is restricted, and functions whose operations are restricted are automatically set to achieve the Pioneer-recommended sound and picture quality. The functions that can be operated are shown below. They can be set as necessary by referring to the operating instructions.

Operable functions/ items

HOME MENU

Full Auto

MCACC

Descriptions Page

34

Input Name

Input Skip

Makes high precision sound field settings easily.

Input names can be changed as desired for easier use.

Inputs not being used are skipped (not displayed).

36

36

36 En


Descriptions

Software

Update

Network

Information

Pairing

Bluetooth

Setup

Updates to the latest version of the software.

Checks the receiver’s IP address.

Pairs with a Bluetooth device using AS-BT100 or

AS-BT200.

Audio Parameters

MCACC

(MCACC preset)

DELAY

(Sound Delay)

PQLS

Selects your favorite

MCACC preset memory.

Adjusts the delay time of the overall sound.

S.RTRV

(Auto Sound

Retriever)

DUAL

V.SB

(Dual Mono)

(Virtual Surround Back)

Plays compressed sound with high sound quality.

Dual monaural audio setting.

Creates a virtual surround back channel sound for playback.

V.HEIGHT

(Virtual

Height)

V.DEPTH

(Virtual

Depth)

Other functions

Creates a virtual height channel sound for playback.

Plays with a sound field suited for 3D images.

INPUT

SELECT

( INPUT

SELECTOR )

MASTER

VOLUME + / – ,

MUTE

LISTENING

MODE

Switches the input.


Only Pioneer-recommended modes can be selected.

Plays using the PQLS function.

Page

93

91

43

57

57

57

57

57

57

57

38

38

45

56


PHASE CTRL

(Phase Control)

Descriptions

Plays with phase shifting in the low range corrected.

Page

47

PHASE CTRL

(Full Band

Phase Control) iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT

CONTROL

The Full Band Phase

Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected.

Switches the input to iPod/

USB and sets the mode allowing operation from the iPod.

48

39


You will return to the Home Menu .

Basic Setup 04

En 37


38

Basic playback


Important

!




Playing a source

Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.

1 Switch on your system components and receiver.

Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver

(press u RECEIVER ).


2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

3 Select the input function you want to play.

You can use the input function buttons on the remote control, INPUT SELECT , or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.

!

If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 47).

4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT

(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.

If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound source, you should hear surround sound.

If you are playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.

!

You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output

Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM

(2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.

!

See also Listening to your system on page 45 for information on different ways of listening to sources.

It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi-channel playback is being performed properly. For details, see Auto

Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 110.

When using a surround back speaker,

2 DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby

Digital 5.1 channel signals, and DTS is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.

If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check the connections and settings.

5 Use the MASTER VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level.

Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.

Playing a source with HDMI connection


2 Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function connected to the receiver’s HDMI input terminals.

You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.

!

Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 57 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no sound will be heard from this receiver).

!

If the video signal does not appear on your

TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, use an analog video connection.

1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the proper output setting.

For example, you might need to set your DVD player to output multichannel analog audio.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then use INPUT SELECT c / d to select MULTI CH IN.

You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel.

!

Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in Other Setup . For details, see Multi

Channel Input Setup on page 92.

Selecting the multichannel analog inputs

SC-LX85 only

If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs for surround sound playback.

!

When the center or surround speakers are bi-amped, no sound is produced even when

MULTI CH IN is selected. (Check Determining the speakers’ application on page 15 and Biamping your speakers on page 18.)

!

When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.

!

With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi

Channel Input Setup on page 92.

Playing an iPod

This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.

!

This receiver is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano (audio only for the iPod nano 1G/2G/6G), iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod touch, iPhone, iPhone

3G, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4 and iPad. However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The receiver is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.

!

This receiver has been developed and tested for the software version of iPod/iPhone/iPad indicated on the website of Pioneer (http:// pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/eu/).

!

Installing software versions other than indicated on the website of Pioneer to your iPod/iPhone/iPad may result in incompatibility with this receiver.

!

iPod, iPhone and iPad are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.

En

Basic playback 05

!

Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.

!

Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.

!

When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone.


See Connecting an iPod on page 31.

!

It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see Switching the iPod controls on page 39.

2 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

3 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen while the receiver verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.

When the display shows the iPod Top menu you’re ready to play music from the iPod.

!

The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.

Playing back audio files stored on an iPod

To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver. You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver.

!

Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.

!

This feature is not available for photos on your iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on page 39).

Finding what you want to play

When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name, album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.

1 Use / j to select ‘Music’ from the iPod Top menu.

2 Use / j to select a category, then press ENTER to browse that category.

!

To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN .

3 Use / j to browse the selected category (e.g., albums).

!

Use k / l to move to previous/next levels.

4 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

Note

!

You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list. For example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.

Basic playback controls

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on an iPod.

!

During Audiobook playback, press i / j to switch the playback speed: Faster f Normal f Slower.

SC-LX85:

!

Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE , then press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.

TV

SOURCE

RECEIVER

STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

CH VOL

VOL


AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU


TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET ENTER

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

RETURN

PTY SEARCH


A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

CH

SC-LX75:

!

iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.

TOP MENU

BAND

LIST TUNE TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE



HOME

HDD

THX

STANDARD

DVD

PHASE CTRL STATUS


HDMI OUT

1 3


4 5 6

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

Switching the iPod controls

You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver.

!

You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.

1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.

This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become inactive.

2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver controls.

Note

!

Change the receiver’s input to the iPod in one action by pressing the iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL button on the front panel to enable iPod operations on the iPod.

Playing a USB device

It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver.

!

Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32.

!

Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility

(operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.


See Connecting a USB device on page 31.

!

Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.


3 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen as this receiver starts recognizing the USB device connected. When the display shows the USB Top menu you’re ready to play from the USB device.

Note

If an Over Current message lights in the display, the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this receiver. Try following the points below:

!

Switch the receiver off, then on again.

En 39


!

Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off.

!

Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power.

If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible.

Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device

The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory device.

!

Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.

1 Use / j to select ‘Music’ from the

USB Top menu.

2 Use / j to select a folder, then press

ENTER to browse that folder.

!


RETURN .


!

Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.

!

DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.


This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices.

SC-LX85:

!

Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE , then press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.

TV

SOURCE

RECEIVER

STATUS

THX

PHASE CTRL

MPX PQLS

CH LEVEL

MEMORY

CH VOL

VOL

PGM

STEREO

MENU


TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

CATEGORY iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

ENTER

TUNE

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

RETURN

PTY SEARCH


A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

CH

SC-LX75:

!

iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.

TOP MENU

BAND

LIST TUNE TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE


PTY

SEARCH

HOME iPod CTRL

MENU TUNE

RETURN

HDD

THX

STANDARD

DVD



HDMI OUT

1 3


4 5 6

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device

!

Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.

1 Use / j to select ‘Photos’ from the

USB Top menu.

2 Use / j to select a folder, then press

ENTER to browse that folder.

!


RETURN .


The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts.

After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between play and pause (only when

Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to

Normal (OFF) ).

!

If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.


Button(s)

ENTER , d

RETURN , k

What it does

Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.

Stops the player and returns to the previous menu.

o

<a> p

<a>

Displays the previous photo content.

Displays the next photo content.

e

<a>

DISP

<a>

Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.

Displays the photo information.

a You can only use this button when Theme on the

Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF) .

Slideshow Setup

Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo files here.

1 Use / j to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Select the setting you want.

!

Theme – Add various effects to the slideshow.

!

Interval – Set the interval for switching the photos. This may not be available depending on the Theme setting.

!

BGM – Play music files stored on the USB device while displaying photos.

!

Music Select – Select the folder containing the music files to be played when BGM is set to ON .


You will return to the USB Top menu.

40 En


About playable file formats

The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.

Music files

Category

MP3

<a>

WAV

WMA

Extension

.mp3

.wav

.wma

MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio

Layer-3

LPCM

WMA8/9



Stream

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency


Channel

Sampling frequency


Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

8 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

8 bit, 16 bit

2 ch, Monaural

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

8 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.

Photo files

Category Extension

JPEG

.jpg

.jpeg

.jpe

.jif

.jfif

Format

Resolution

Meeting the following conditions:

!

Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF format)

!

Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0

30 to 8184 pixels vertical, 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal

Listening to the radio

The following steps show you how to tune in to

FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later-see

Saving station presets on page 41 for more on how to do this.


2 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

3 Use BAND to change the band (FM or

AM), if necessary.

4 Tune to a station.

There are three ways to do this:

!

Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the currently selected band, press and hold TUNE i / j for about a second. The receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one.

Repeat to search for other stations.

!

Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step at a time, press TUNE i / j .

!

High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE i / j for high speed tuning. Release the button at the frequency you want.

Using the noise cut mode

The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM broadcasts. Press MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to 2).

Using Neural Surround

This feature uses Neural Surround TM technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from

FM radio.

!

While listening to FM radio, press

AUTO/ALC/DIRECT for Neural Surround.

!

The mode can be selected also with STANDARD .

Tuning directly to a station



3 Use BAND to change the band (FM or

AM), if necessary.

4 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).

5 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.

For example, to tune to 106.00

(FM), press 1 , 0 ,

6 , 0 , 0 .

If you make a mistake halfway through, press

D.ACCESS

twice to cancel the frequency and start over.

Improving FM sound

If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode. This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.

Saving station presets

If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.

En 41


1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.

See Listening to the radio on page 41 for more on this.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET MEMORY , then a blinking memory class.

3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET k / l to select the station preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.

4 Press ENTER.

After pressing ENTER , the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET NAME , then a blinking cursor at the first character position.

3 Input the name you want.

Use i / j to select a character, k / l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Note

!

To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.

!

Once you have named a station preset, you can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency.

Listening to station presets



3 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored.

Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to

G.

4 Press PRESET k / l to select the station preset you want.

!

You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the station preset.

An introduction to RDS

Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of information-the name of the station and the kind of show they’re broadcasting, for example.

One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of program. For example, you can search for a station that’s broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ .

You can search the following program types:

!

In addition, there are two other program types,

TEST and NONE . You can’t search for these.

Naming station presets

For easier identification, you can name your station presets.

1 Choose the station preset you want to name.

See Listening to station presets on page 42 for how to do this.

NEWS - News

AFFAIRS - Current Affairs

INFO - General Information

SPORT - Sport

EDUCATE - Educational

DRAMA - Radio plays, etc.

CULTURE - National or regional culture, theater, etc.

SCIENCE - Science and technology

VARIED - Usually talkbased material, such as quiz shows or interviews.

POP M - Pop music

ROCK M - Rock music

EASY M - Easy listening

LIGHT M - ‘Light’ classical music

CLASSICS - ‘Serious’ classical music

OTHER M - Music not fitting above categories

WEATHER - Weather reports

FINANCE - Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc.

CHILDREN - Programs for children

SOCIAL - Social affairs

RELIGION - Programs concerning religion

PHONE IN - Public expressing their views by phone

TRAVEL - Holiday-type travel rather than traffic announcements

LEISURE - Leisure interests and hobbies

JAZZ - Jazz

COUNTRY - Country music

NATION M - Popular music in a language other than English

OLDIES - Popular music from the ’50s and ’60s

FOLK M - Folk music

DOCUMENT - Documentary

Searching for RDS programs

One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to search for a particular kind of radio program. You can search for any of the program types listed above.


2 Press TUNER to select the FM band.

!

RDS is only possible in the FM band.

3 Press PTY SEARCH.

PTY SEARCH shows in the display.

4 Press PRESET k / l to select the program type you want to hear.

5 Press ENTER to search for the program type.

The system starts searching through all frequencies for a match. When it finds one, the search stops and the station plays for five seconds.

6 If you want to keep listening to the station, press ENTER within the five seconds.

If you don’t press ENTER , searching resumes.

If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find that program type at the time of the search.

!

RDS searches all frequencies. If the program type could not be found among all the frequencies, NO PTY is displayed.

Displaying RDS information

Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS information available.

!

If any noise is picked up while displaying the

RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.

!

If you see NO RT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station.

!

If you see NO PS DATA in the PS display, it means no PS data can be received.

!

If you see NO PTY DATA in the PTY display, it means no PTY data can be received.

% Press DISP for RDS information.

Each press changes the display as follows:

!

Radio Text ( RT ) – Messages sent by the radio station. For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone number as RT.

!

Program Service Name ( PS ) – The name of the radio station.

!

Program Type ( PTY ) – This indicates the kind of program currently being broadcast.

!

Current tuner frequency.

42 En


Bluetooth

Wireless Enjoyment of Music

Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device: cell phone

ADAPTER for

Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device:

Digital music player

Device not equipped with

Bluetooth wireless technology:

Digital music player

+

Bluetooth audio transmitter

(sold commercially)

Music data

This receiver

STANDBY/ON

ADVANCED

MCACC FL OFF HDMI iPod iPhone iPad

MASTER

VOLUME

Remote control operation

Bluetooth

®

ADAPTER

Wireless music play

When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or

AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology

(portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly. Also, by using a commercially available transmitter supporting Bluetooth wireless technology, you can listen to music on a device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology.

The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models supports

SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T type Bluetooth wireless technology.

!

With the AS-BT100, some functions may not be available on this receiver.

Remote control operation

The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to play and stop media, and perform other operations.

!

It must be necessary that the Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device supports

AVRCP profiles.

!

Remote control operations cannot be guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

Pairing the

Bluetooth

ADAPTER and

Bluetooth

wireless technology device

“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared.

The pairing step is necessary to register the

Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable

Bluetooth communications. For more details, see also the operating instructions of your

Bluetooth wireless technology device.

!

Pairing is required when you first use the

Bluetooth wireless technology device and

Bluetooth ADAPTER.

!

To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing should be done with both your system and


!

If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s security code is “0000”, there is no need to make the security code setting on the receiver.

Press ADAPTER (SC-LX85) / ADPT (SC-LX75) to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

!

When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit complies with Bluetooth Specifications

Ver. 2.1. When this unit and another device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver.

2.1, pairing of the two may be possible without the need for inputting a password.

In this case, a passcode may be displayed on this receiver and on the device equipped with

Bluetooth wireless technology. If this happens, check that the same passcode is displayed on this receiver and the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, then select YES with the k and l keys and press

ENTER . After this, also perform the connection operation on the Bluetooth device to be connected. If the passcode does not match the code displayed on the Bluetooth device to be connected, select NO to cancel pairing, then try starting over.

Press ADAPTER (SC-LX85) / ADPT (SC-LX75) to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

!

Pair one unit at a time.

!

When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth connections with a device equipped with the

Bluetooth function to listen to music, do not connect any devices other than this receiver by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetooth equipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is already established with a device other than this receiver, disconnect the other device before connecting this receiver.


2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press

ENTER.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.

4 Select ‘Pairing Bluetooth Device’, then press ENTER.

5 Select the ‘Passcode’ setting you want.

Select the same passcode as the Bluetooth wireless technology device you wish to connect.

!

0000/1234/8888 – Select the passcode from these options. These are the passcodes that can be used in most cases.

!

Others – Select to use a passcode other than those mentioned above.

6 If you selected ‘Others’ in step 5, enter the passcode.

Use i / j to select a number and k / l to move the cursor.

7 Follow the instructions displayed on the GUI screen to conduct pairing with the

Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology device that you want to make pair, place it near the receiver and set it to the pairing mode.

8 Check to see that the Bluetooth

ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is connected:

CONNECTED appears in the receiver display.

!

The system can display alphanumeric characters only. Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not connected:

Go back to the passcode setting in step 5. In this case, perform the connection operation from the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

9 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list, select Bluetooth

ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected in step 5.

!

The passcode may in some cases be referred to as PASSKEY or PIN code.

En 43


44

Listening to music contents of a

Bluetooth

wireless technology device with your system


2 Press ADAPTER (SC-LX85) / ADPT (SC-

LX75) on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.

!

When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged into the ADAPTER PORT , NO ADAPTER will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is selected.

3 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device, perform the operation to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER.

4 Start playback of music contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on

Bluetooth wireless technology devices.

!

Bluetooth wireless technology device should be compatible with AVRCP profile.

!

Depending on the Bluetooth wireless technology device you use, operation may differ from what is shown in the remote control buttons.

SC-LX85:

5 While listening to a source, set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press ADV SURR repeatedly to select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.

The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER

CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

CH

TV

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

VOL

STATUS

THX

PHASE CTRL

MPX PQLS

CH LEVEL

MEMORY

PGM

STEREO

MENU


SC-LX75:

HDD

THX

DVD



AUDIO

1

HDMI OUT

222 3

En

Listening to your system 06

Listening to your system

set volume. The sound balancer controls three major theater sound elements dialogue, bass and surround with original algorithm.


Important

!




Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes

Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.

To play with surround sound, check “ Standard surround sound ”, “ Using the Home THX modes ” or “ Using the Advanced surround effects ” below and select the desired mode.

To play with the optimum mode for the input signal, see “ Auto playback ” or “ Using Stream

Direct ”. (The sound is played in stereo when

2-channel signals are input, in surround when multi-channel signals are input.)

Important

!

The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the current source, settings and status of the receiver.

Auto playback

There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but the simplest, most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.


2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT

(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for auto playback of a source.

AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.

!

If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby

Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

!

When listening to the FM radio, the Neural

Surround feature is selected automatically

(see Using Neural Surround on page 41 for more on this).

!

When listening to the ADAPTER PORT input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is selected automatically.

ALC – In the Auto level control ( ALC ) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels.

Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night.

OPTIMUM SURR – In the Optimum Surround mode, this receiver automatically optimizes sound balance in each scene based on actually

Note

!

When ALC is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in

Setting the Audio options on page 57.

Standard surround sound

The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.


2 While listening to a source, press

STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).

If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.

!

If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby

Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

!

If the surround back speakers are not connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2

Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).

With two channel sources , you can select from:

!

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to movie sources

!

2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to music sources

!

2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to video games

!

2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound from the surround speakers is mono)

!

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 9.1 channel sound (surround back and front height)

!

WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound (front wide), especially suited to movie sources

!

WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound (front wide), especially suited to music sources

!

Neo:X CINEMA – Up to 9.1 channel sound

(surround back and front height or surround back and front wide), especially suited to movie sources

!

Neo:X MUSIC – Up to 9.1 channel sound

(surround back and front height or surround back and front wide), especially suited to music sources

!

Neo:X GAME – Up to 9.1 channel sound

(surround back and front height or surround back and front wide), especially suited to video games

!

Neural Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound

(surround back), especially suited to music sources

!

STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound settings and you can still use the audio options.

With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back, front height or front wide speakers , you can select (according to format):

!

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above

!

2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above

!

Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)

!

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above

!

WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above

!

WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above

!

Neo:X CINEMA – See above

!

Neo:X MUSIC – See above

!

Neo:X GAME – See above

!

DTS-ES Matrix or DTS-ES Discrete – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS-

ES encoded sources

!

STEREO – See above

!

Straight Decode – Plays back without the effects above.

En 45


46

Note

!

When listening sources in

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN

effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 57).

!

When listening to 2-channel sources in

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust:

C.WIDTH

, DIMENSION and PANORAMA . See

Setting the Audio options on page 57 to adjust them.

!

When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:X

Cinema, Neo:X Music or Neo:X Game mode, you can also adjust the C.GAIN

effect (see

Setting the Audio options on page 57).

!

Neural Surround can be selected for

2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-channel sources.

!

The stereo mode can also be selected by pressing the STEREO button.

!

When listening through headphones, you can select STEREO mode only.

Using the Home THX modes

THX and Home THX are technical standards created by THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX is designed to make home theater audio sound more like what you hear in a cinema.

Different THX options will be available depending on the source and the setting for surround back channel processing (see THX Audio Setting on page 89 for more on this).


2 Press THX (HOME THX) to select a listening mode.

With two channel sources , press THX repeatedly to select a matrix-decoding process for the

THX CINEMA mode (see THX Audio Setting on page 89 for an explanation of each process):

!

THX CINEMA

!

THX MUSIC

!

THX GAMES

!

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA

!

2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA

!

Neo:X CINEMA+THX CINEMA

!

2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC

!

Neo:X MUSIC+THX MUSIC

!

2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES

!

Neo:X GAME+THX GAMES

!

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA

!

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC

!

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES

With multichannel sources , press THX

( HOME THX ) repeatedly to select from:

!

THX CINEMA

!

THX MUSIC

!

THX GAMES

!

THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources

!

Neo:X CINEMA+THX CINEMA

!

Neo:X MUSIC+THX MUSIC

!

Neo:X GAME+THX GAMES

!

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA

!

2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC

!

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA

!

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC

!

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES

Note

!

When listening sources in 2

Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN

effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 57).

Using the Advanced surround effects

The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects.

Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.


2 Press ADV SURR

(ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a listening mode.

!

ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks

!

DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog

!

SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects

!

MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks

!

ENT.SHOW

– Suitable for musical sources

!

EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field

!

TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources

!

ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games

!

SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs

!

CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound

!

ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock and/or pop music

!

UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources

!

EXT.STEREO

– Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers

!

F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges.

!

F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.

WIDE position FOCUS position

(Recommended)

Front left

speaker

Front right

speaker

Front left

speaker

Front right

speaker

!

SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for listening to the sound from a Bluetooth wireless technology device. The

SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only be selected when the ADAPTER PORT input.

!

PHONES SURR – When listening through headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.

Note

!

When an Advanced Surround listening mode is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the

Audio options on page 57.

However, with F.S.SURR FOCUS ,

F.S.SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR , the effect level cannot be adjusted.

!

The Front Stage Surround Advance

( F.S.SURR FOCUS and F.S.SURR WIDE ) function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.

Using Stream Direct

Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog or digital sound source.

En

Listening to your system 06

Processing differs depending on the input signal and whether or not surround back speakers are connected. For details, see Auto Surround,

ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 110.


2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT

(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select the mode you want.

Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.

!

AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 45.

!

ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode

(page 45).

!

DIRECT – Plays back sound from the source with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT . With DIRECT , the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by the MCACC system and the Phase Control effect.

!

PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified sound from source with only minimal digital treatment.

!

OPTIMUM SURR – Listening in Optimum

Surround mode (page 45).

Note

!

When listening through headphones, you can select ALC , OPTIMUM SURR or PURE DIRECT mode only.

Selecting MCACC presets

!

Default setting: MEMORY 1

If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions, you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).


2 While listening to a source, press

MCACC.

Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets. See Data Management on page 86 to check and manage your current settings.

!

These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.

!

You can also press k / l to select the

MCACC preset.

Choosing the input signal

On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below.

!

This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital,

PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including

DTS 96/24) digital signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-

EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.

!

You may get digital noise when an LD, CD,

DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections (page 24) and set the signal input to DIGITAL .

!

Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals.

For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.


2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the source component.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

!

AUTO – The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order: HDMI ;

DIGITAL ; ANALOG .

!

ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.

!

DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.

!

HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH , the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.

When set to DIGITAL , HDMI or AUTO (only selected DIGITAL or HDMI ), the indicators light according to the signal being decoded (see

Display on page 12).

Better sound using Phase

Control

This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound.

Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound sources.


2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.

The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.

Note

!

Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction.

If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.

!

For discs created with standards other than

Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. Phase

Control Plus function corrects for phase shifting on such discs. For instructions on setting the Phase Control Plus, see Setting the


!

If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However, the effect you can actually feel when

PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.

!

Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.

!

If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.

!

The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to

ON in the following cases:

— When headphones are plugged in.

— When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the


En 47


48

Better sound using Phase

Control and Full Band Phase

Control

This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase Control and Full Band

Phase Control. Activating Full Band Phase

Control is strongly recommended because it also involves the effects of Phase Control.

The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected.

Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency bands output from a speaker system consisting of multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and low-frequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases where the group delay characteristics are not effectively flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers subsequently causes group delay (the delay of low-frequency sound against high-frequency sound) during audio signal playback.

This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers by measuring test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase characteristics during audio signal playback - the same correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers.

This correction minimizes group delay between the ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges.

Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration for multichannel setting.

En


2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to select FULLBAND PHASE.

Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase

Control functions are switched on. The

FULL BAND and indicator, on the front panel lights.

!

The mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:

— When headphones are plugged in.

— When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the


Note

!

To calibrate and analyze the frequencyphase characteristics of the speakers, either follow the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC

(see Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page

34), or set Auto MCACC menu under

Auto MCACC under ADVANCED MCACC to

Full Band Phase Ctrl . Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC with Auto MCACC menu. Upon calibration of the frequencyphase characteristics of the speakers, the

Full Band Phase Ctrl feature is automatically switched on.

!

The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the GUI screen (see

Checking MCACC Data on page 85). Also, by transferring the measurement data to the computer using the CD-ROM (AVNavigator), the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the Advanced MCACC PC Display

Application Software included on the CD-ROM

(AVNavigator).

!

Depending on the input signal and listening mode, it may not be possible to set the

Full Band Phase Ctrl mode to ON .

Using the Full Band Phase

Control’s FRONT ALIGN function

Full Band Phase Control calibrates frequency phase disturbances (group delay) for the full speaker band (Full Band) ( SYMMETRY ), but with this unit it is also possible to calibrate the frequency phase characteristics of other speakers to the frequency phase characteristics of the front speakers ( FRONT ALIGN ).

Full Band Phase Control calibration can be performed in the FRONT ALIGN mode by making the settings and performing the operations below.

1 Perform Full Band Phase Control measurements with the Full Auto MCACC

(or Auto MCACC) procedure.

2 Perform measurements with EQ Type set to FRONT ALIGN with the Full Auto

MCACC (or Auto MCACC) procedure.

3 Press the MCACC button to select the MCACC memory at which the measurements performed with EQ Type set to FRONT ALIGN are stored.

4 Turn Full Band Phase Control on.

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07

Playback with HOME MEDIA

GALLERY inputs

Introduction


Important

!




Enjoying the Home Media

Gallery

This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function allows you to listen to audio files or listen to

Internet radio stations on a computer or other component connected to the receiver’s LAN terminal. This chapter describes the setup and playback procedures required to enjoy these features. It is advisory that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component.

!

To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service

Provider) beforehand.

!

Photo or video files cannot be played back.

!

With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows

Media Player 12, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver.

Features of Home Media

Gallery

This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your components to these terminals.

% Playback the music files stored in PCs

You can playback a lot of musics stored in your

PCs using this unit.

d See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 50 and Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 50.

!

Besides a PC, you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built-in media server function based on DLNA

1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and protocols

(i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio systems).

% Listening to Internet radio stations

You can select and listen to your favorite

Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products.

d See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 50 and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 50.

About playable DLNA network devices

The Home Media Gallery allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver.

This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following:

!

PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 installed

!

PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with

Windows Media Player 12 installed

!

DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on

PCs or other components)

Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media

Server) as described above can be played via command from an external Digital Media

Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this

DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital

Media Renderers). This receiver supports this

DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such operations as playing and stopping files can be performed from the external controller.

Volume adjustment and the muting control are also possible. The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode (aside from certain buttons, including the MASTER VOLUME + / – , MUTE and DISP ).

!

Depending on the external controller being used, playback may be interrupted when the volume is adjusted from the controller. In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.

Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes

This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later, and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later.

To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes. * 1

The receiver’s input will switch automatically to

Home Media Gallery when AirPlay is in use. * 2

The following operations can be performed when in AirPlay mode:

!

Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.

!

Pause/resume, next/previous track, and shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the receiver.

!

Display of the currently playing track information on the receiver’s display, including artist, song and album name.

* 1: For more information, see the Apple website (http://www.apple.com).

* 2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on when Network Standby at Network Setup is set to ON .

Note

!

A network environment is required to use

AirPlay.

!

The receiver’s name that shows up in the

AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and iTunes can be changed by Friendly Name from Network Setup .

!

AirPlay provided on this receiver has been developed and tested based on the software versions for the iPod, iPhone, iPad and the software versions for iTunes that are indicated on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not be compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes software versions other than those indicated on the Pioneer website.

About the DHCP server function

To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does

En 49

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

50 not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually.

Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See Network Setup menu on page 89 for more on this.

Authorizing this receiver

In order to be able to play with Home Media

Gallery, this receiver must be authorized. This happens automatically when the receiver makes a connection over the network to the PC.

If not, please authorize this receiver manually on the PC. The authorization (or permission) method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected. For more information on authorizing this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your server.

Playback with Home Media

Gallery

Important

!

When you play back audio files,

‘ Connecting...

’ is displayed before playback starts. The display may continue for several seconds depending on the type of file.

!

In case a domain is configured in a Windows network environment, you cannot access a PC on the network while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.

!

There are cases where the time elapsed may not be correctly displayed.


2 Press HMG to select Home Media

Gallery as the input function.

It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network. The following screen

En appears when the Home Media Gallery is selected as the input function. The number next to indicates the number of connected servers.

1

Top Menu

A/V RECEIVER

Internet Radio

******

Recently Played

5 Repeat step 3 to play back the desired song.

For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section shown below.

!

Internet radio stations – See Listening to

Internet radio stations on page 50.

!

Server – See Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 50.

1/4

!

The server without the mark cannot be accessed.

3 Use / j to select the category you want to play back, and then press ENTER.

Select a category from the following list:

!

Internet Radio – Internet radio

!

Server Name – Server components on the network

!

Favorites – Favorite songs currently being registered

!

Recently played – Internet Radio listening history (most recent 20 incidents)

Depending on the selected category, the names of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.

4 Use / j to select the folder, music files or Internet radio station to play back, and then press ENTER.

Press i / j to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item. When you press ENTER , playback starts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN .

When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds while the list screen is displayed.

Only audio files with the mark can be played.

In case of the folders with the mark, use i / j and ENTER to select the desired folder and audio files.

Playing back audio files stored on components on the network

You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not available for operation depending on the category currently being played back.

SC-LX85:

!

Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE , then press HMG to switch the remote control to the

HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.

TV

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CH VOL

VOL

STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL


AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU


TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

CATEGORY iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

ENTER

TUNE

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

RETURN

PTY SEARCH


A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

CH

SC-LX75:

!

HMG to switch the remote control to the

HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TUNE TOOLS

PRESET ENTER

HOME iPod CTRL

MENU TUNE

PRESET

RETURN

HDD

THX

STANDARD

DVD



HDMI OUT

1 3


4 5 6

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

Listening to Internet radio stations

Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world. Some are hosted, managed, and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there is a connection to the Internet, as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region.

Depending on the Internet line conditions, the sound may not be smooth when playing

Internet radio.

About list of Internet radio

The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with this receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner on page 112.

Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations

You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations. See Advanced operations for

Internet radio on page 51 for more on this.

!

To listen to Internet radio stations, you must have high-speed broadband Internet access.

With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.

!

The port number varies depending on the

Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.


!

A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons.

!

Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations.

Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special

Pioneer site

With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and played. Check the access code required for registration on the receiver, use this access code to access the special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites.

The address of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.

To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media

Gallery on page 50.

2 Use / j to select ‘Help’, then press

ENTER.

3 Use / j to select ‘Get access code’, then press ENTER.

The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed.

Make a memo of this address.

The following can be checked on the Help screen:

!

Get access code – The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer

Internet radio site is displayed.

!

Show Your WebID/PW – After registering on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID and password are displayed.

!

Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the information registered on the special

Pioneer Internet radio site. When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared. If you want to listen to the same stations, re-register after resetting.

4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the registration process.

http://www.radio-pioneer.com

Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration, following the instructions on the screen.

5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites, following the instructions on the computer’s screen.

Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played.

Playing back your favorite songs

You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder.

Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered.

Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the Favorites folder

Press PGM while a song is being played back or stopped. The selected song is then registered in the Favorites folder.

Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be registered.

To delete a registered song, select the Favorites folder, select the song you want to delete from the folder, and press CLR . The selected song is then deleted from the Favorites folder.

Advanced operations for

Internet radio

Saving Internet radio stations

This receiver can remember the Internet radio stations that you often listen to in seven classes

( A to G ) with up to nine stations in each class to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum capacity.


2 Tune into the Internet radio station that you want to save.

Tune into the desired Internet radio station by following Steps 1 to 3 on page 50.

3 Press T.EDIT to switch to the stationsaving mode.

4 Press CLASS to select the class that you want to save the station in.

Select the desired class from A to G .

5 Use / j to select the number that you want to save the station as, and then press ENTER.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons. Select the desired number from 1 to 9.

Retrieving saved Internet radio stations

You need to save Internet radio stations first before retrieving them. If there are no Internet radio stations currently being saved, see Saving

Internet radio stations on page 51 and save at least one Internet radio station before proceeding with the following steps.


2 Select the class that you want to retrieve an Internet radio station from.

Each time you press CLASS , the class switches to A to G in turn.

3 Use / j to select the station number that you want to retrieve.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons.

‘ Preset Not Stored ’ appears when you select an Internet radio station currently not being saved.

About network playback

The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies:

Windows Media Player

See Windows Media Player 11/

Windows Media Player 12 on page 113 for more on this.

Windows Media DRM

Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights

Management (WMDRM) is a platform to protect and securely deliver content for playback on computers, portable devices and network devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a

WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM protected content can only be played on media servers supporting WMDRM.

Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content. If the

WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download licenses for protected content, you agree that

En 51

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

DLNA

DLNA CERTIFIED TM Audio Player

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home.

The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA

Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5.

When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player, some setting changes of software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information.

DLNA TM , the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED TM are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

Content playable over a network

!

Even when encoded in a compatible format, some files may not play correctly.

!

If a file or Internet radio station cannot be played, the next file or playable Internet radio station is played automatically.

!

Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.

!

There are cases where you cannot listen to an

Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a list of radio stations.

!

Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used.

!

Supported file formats vary by server. As such, files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit. For more information check with the manufacturer of your server.

Disclaimer for Third Party Content

Access to content provided by third parties requires a high speed internet connection and may also require account registration and a paid subscription.

Third party content services may be changed, suspended, interrupted, or discontinued at any time without notice, and Pioneer disclaims any liability in connection with such occurrences.

Pioneer does not represent or warrant that content services will continue to be provided or available for a particular period of time, and any such warranty, express or implied, is disclaimed.

About playback behavior over a network

!

Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content.

!

If there are problems within the network environment (heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be displayed or played properly (playback may be interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a 100BASE-

TX connection between player and PC is recommended.

!

If several clients are playing simultaneously, as the case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.

!

Depending on the security software installed on a connected PC and the setting of such software, network connection may be blocked.

Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and/or the Home Media Gallery features due to communication error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your PC, or other connected equipment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or

Internet service provider.

“Windows Media TM

Corporation.

” is a trademark of Microsoft

This product includes technology owned by

Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft

Licensing, Inc.

Microsoft ® , Windows ® 7, Windows ® Vista,

Windows ®

Windows ®

XP, Windows ® 2000,

Millennium Edition, Windows ® 98, and

WindowsNT ® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

52 En


About playable file formats

The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.

!

Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this case playback may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.

Category Extension Stream

FLAC .flac

FLAC

Sampling frequency


Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

32 kHz to 192 kHz

8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit

2 ch

—

— a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.

Music files

Category Extension Stream

MP3

<a>

LPCM

WAV

WMA

AAC

.mp3

—



.wav

.wma

.m4a

.aac

.3gp

.3g2

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer-3

LPCM

LPCM

WMA2/7/8

WMA9

MPEG-4 AAC LC

MPEG-4 HE AAC

(aacPlus v1/2)

Sampling frequency


Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency


Channel

Sampling frequency


Channel

Sampling frequency


Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency


Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency


Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

8 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit, 20 bit

2 ch

8 kHz to 192 kHz

16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit

2 ch

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

5 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

5 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

16 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

En 53


54

Control with HDMI function


Important

!




!

You cannot use this function with components that do not support Control with HDMI.

!

We only guarantee this receiver will work with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible components and components of other makes that support the Control with HDMI function. However, we do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components of other makes that support the

Control with HDMI function.

!

Use a High Speed HDMI ® cable when you want to use the Control with HDMI function.

The Control with HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used.

!

For details about concrete operations, settings, etc., refer to also the operating instructions for each component.

About the Control with HDMI function

Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray

Disc player or with a component of another make that supports the Control with HDMI functions are possible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.

!

The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

!

The receiver’s input switches over automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

!

The receiver’s power is also set to standby, when the TV’s power is set to standby.

Making Control with HDMI connections

You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and up to 7 other components.

!

Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to the audio input of this unit. When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio

Return Channel) function, the sound of the

TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at

HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 54).

For details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 25.

Important

!

With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”.

Important

!

When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.

!

After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The

HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.

When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF , you can skip this process. For details about the

Control with HDMI feature, see Control with

HDMI function on page 54.

!

To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver.

!

The Control with HDMI function can be used with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, but not with a TV connected to the

HDMI OUT 2 terminal.

HDMI Setup

You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMIcompatible components in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component.


2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press

ENTER.

3 Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER.

4 Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.

Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with

HDMI function ON or OFF . You will need to set it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function.

When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF .

!

ON – Enables the Control with HDMI function. When this unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the Control with HDMI function, the audio and video outputs from the HDMI connection are output from the TV.

Also, by setting this to ON , the Auto Sound

Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link functions can be operated automatically by connecting a player supporting the respective functions. See Setting the Audio options on page 57 for details on Auto Sound

Retriever Link, Setting the Video options on page 59 for details on Stream Smoother Link.

!

OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled.

Synchronized operations cannot be used.

When this unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output.

5 Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you want.

Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for all linked functions or the PQLS function only.

However, Display Power Off will activate the settings set forth in step 6 below.

!

ALL – Enabled for all linked functions.

!

PQLS – Enabled only for the PQLS function.

When PQLS is selected, link functions other than the PQLS function may not work properly. If you wish to use all link functions, select ALL .

6 Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting you want.

If the TV’s power is turned off while using the

Control with HDMI function, the receiver’s

En

Control with HDMI function 08 power is also turned off (all power off function).

This function can be disabled.

!

YES – The all power off function is enabled.

The receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power. This function only works when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.

!

NO – The all power off function is disabled.

The receiver’s power is not affected when the

TV’s power is turned off.

7 Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting you want.

When Control is ON , the signals of the input device or TV connected to the receiver can be transferred even when the receiver’s power is in the standby mode (Standby Through mode). The power consumption in this Standby Through mode can be set to conserve energy.

!

Normal – Regular mode. Power-up time from the Standby Through mode is short.

!

Eco – Power consumption in the Standby

Through mode is reduced. Some time is required for powering up from the Standby

Through mode.

8 Select the ‘TV Audio’ setting you want.

When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio

Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal.

!

Normal – The TV’s sound is input from the

Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs.

!

via HDMI – The TV’s sound is input via the

HDMI terminal. This can only be selected when Control is set to ON .

9 Select the ‘12V Trigger’ setting you want.

The component connected to the 12 V

TRIGGER jack can be turned on and off when HDMI OUT is switched. HDMI OUT 1 ,

HDMI OUT 2 or OFF can be selected. Select

OFF when you want the component to switch when the input function is switched.

10 Select the ‘Speaker B Link’ setting you want.

The speaker terminal settings (the settings set with the SPEAKERS button) can be switched automatically when HDMI OUT is switched by turning the Speaker B Link setting on.

This is only valid when “ 7.1ch + Speaker B ” or “ 5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp ” is selected for the

Speaker System setting.

!

OFF – The speaker terminal settings do not switch automatically when HDMI OUT is switched.

!

ON – The speaker terminal settings switch automatically when HDMI OUT is switched.

For details, see Switching the HDMI output on page 62.

11 When you’re finished, press

HOME MENU.

Before using synchronization

Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:

1 Put all components into standby mode.

2 Turn the power on for all components, with the power for the TV being turned on last.

3 Choose the HDMI input to which the

TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not.

4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed.

About synchronized operations

The Control with HDMI-compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below.

!

From the menu screen of the Control with

HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played through this receiver, and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode.

!

When in the synchronized amp mode, you can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the sound using the TV’s remote control.

!

When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to be played through the receiver from the TV’s menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode.

!

When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.

!

When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces sound from the TV is performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc.

!

When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.)

!

The receiver’s input switches automatically when the Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

!

The receiver’s input switches automatically when the TV’s input is switched.

!

The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if the receiver’s input is switched to a component other than one connected by

HDMI.

The operations below can also be used on

Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs.

!

When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound is muted, the volume status is displayed on the TV’s screen.

!

When the OSD language is switched on the TV, the receiver’s language setting also switches accordingly.

About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the Control with HDMI function

The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected to a TV of a brand other than

Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI function. (Depending on the TV, however, some of the Control with HDMI functions may not work.)

!

When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV)

!

The sound of TV programs or an external input connected to the TV can also be output from the speakers connected to the receiver.

(If the TV does not support the HDMI ARC

(Audio Return Channel) function, this requires connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in addition to the HDMI cable.)

The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected to a player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the

Control with HDMI function.

!

When playback starts on the player or recorder, the receiver’s input switches to the HDMI input to which that component is connected.

See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support the Control with HDMI function.

En 55


56

Setting the PQLS function

PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the Control with HDMI function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is generated upon transmission.

!

On players compatible with PQLS Bit-stream,

PQLS always works for all sources.

!

On players compatible with PQLS Multi

Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio output to Linear PCM.

!

On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio,

PQLS only works when playing CDs.

Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information.

This function is activated when Control is set to ON .

!

If a listening mode other than

AUTO SURROUND , ALC , DIRECT ,

PURE DIRECT , OPTIMUM SURR or STEREO is selected while the PQLS effect is enabled, the

PQLS effect is disabled.

!

When this receiver is connected by HDMI cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS function via HDMI connection and HDMI reauthentication is performed

(the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening mode is set to

AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND , ALC , DIRECT ,

PURE DIRECT , OPTIMUM SURR or STEREO is selected.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting.

The setting is displayed on the front panel display.

!

PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface.

This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLScompatible players.

!

PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.

About Auto Sound Retriever

Link and Stream Smoother

Link

These are automatic functions allowing you to output optimum audio and video signals from the receiver using the Control with HDMI function. When a player supporting the respective function is connected to the receiver by HDMI, the sound/picture is optimized for the compressed audio/video file played on the player.

!

Depending on the compressed audio/video file format, it may not be operated automatically.

Auto Sound Retriever Link

When playing a compressed audio file on the player, the file’s bitrate information is acquired using the Control with HDMI function, and the sound is optimized on the receiver based on this information.

To activate the Auto Sound Retriever Link function, make the setting below.

1 Set the HDMI Setup’s Control to ON, and set the Control Mode setting to ALL.

See HDMI Setup on page 54.

2 Set the S.RTRV (Auto Sound Retriever) setting to ON.

See Setting the Audio options on page 57.

Stream Smoother Link

Using the Control with HDMI function, the receiver automatically detects whether a compressed video file is being played on the player, and if so automatically activates the Stream

Smoother function.

To activate the Stream Smoother Link function, make the setting below.

1 Set the HDMI Setup’s Control to ON, and set the Control Mode setting to ALL.


2 Set the STREAM (Stream Smoother) setting to AUTO.

See Setting the Video options on page 59.

Cautions on the Control with

HDMI function

!

Connect the TV directly to this receiver.

Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

!

Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an

AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

!

When Control is set to ON , HDMI Input in The Input Setup menu on page 36 is automatically set to OFF .

!

When the receiver’s Control is turned ON , even if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is possible to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the receiver, but only when a Control with HDMIcompatible component (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) and compatible TV are connected. In this case, the receiver’s power turns on and the

HDMI indicator lights.

En

Using other functions 09

Using other functions


Important

!

The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC-LX85 and SC-LX75. For the SC-LX85’s remote control, set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER . For the SC-LX75’s remote control, press the button. When

“set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Setting the Audio options

There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

!

Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, settings and status of the receiver.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press

AUDIO PARAMETER.

2 Use / j to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

3 Use / l to set as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Audio parameter menu

Setting

MCACC

(MCACC preset)

EQ

(Acoustic Calibration

EQ)

What it does

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC preset memory has been renamed, the given name is displayed.

Option(s) c M1. MEMORY 1 to M6.

MEMORY 6 d

Default: M1. MEMORY 1

ON

Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.

OFF

Setting

S-WAVE

(Standing Wave)

Phase C+

(Phase Control Plus)

DELAY

(Sound Delay)

TONE

(Tone Control)

BASS

<a>

TREBLE

<a>

S.RTRV

(Auto Sound Retriever)



DNR

(Digital Noise Reduction)

DIALOG E

(Dialog Enhancement)

<c>

What it does

Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.

Option(s)

ON

OFF

For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. This function corrects for phase shifting on such discs.

Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video.

c

Default: c

0 to 16 (ms)

0.0 to 10.0 (frames)

0.0

d

1 second = 25 frames (PAL)

Default:

6ms d

Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses them completely.

Adjusts the amount of bass.

Adjusts the amount of treble.

With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression, improving the sound’s sense of density and modulation.

When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents input to the USB memory audio and HOME MEDIA

GALLERY (digital audio input only) to achieve high sound quality.

Also, when a player supporting the Auto Sound Retriever

Link function is connected to the receiver by HDMI, by setting this to ON , the bitrate information of the compressed audio file being played on the player is acquired using the Control with HDMI function, and the sound is optimized based on this information (Auto Sound

Retriever Link).

May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.

This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.

Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UP3 up to UP4, you can make the sound source seem to relocate upwards.

BYPASS

ON c –6 to +6 (dB) d

Default: 0 (dB) c –6 to +6 (dB) d

Default: 0 (dB)

OFF

ON

OFF

ON c OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/UP3/

UP4 d

Default: OFF

En 57


Setting

Hi-bit32

DFILTER

(Digital Filter)

DUAL

(Dual Mono)

Fixed PCM

DRC

(Dynamic Range

Control)

<d>

LFE

(LFE Attenuate)

SACD GAIN

<e>

HDMI

(HDMI Audio)

<f>

What it does

Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like

CDs, DVDs or BDs. Smoother, more delicate musical expression can be achieved by requantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit compressed audio signals or 24 bit compressed/ lossless audio signals to 32 bit.

Switches the AUDIO DAC (Digital Audio Converter) digital filter type. One of three settings can be selected:

SLOW (soft and warm), SHARP (solid and tight) and

SHORT (quick and forward).

Option(s)

ON

OFF

SLOW (Hi-Sampling)

SHARP

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.

SHORT

CH1 – Channel 1 is heard only

CH2 – Channel 2 is heard only

CH1 CH2 – Both channels heard from front speakers

OFF This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.

When ON is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.

Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus,

Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).

Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the

LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers.

The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree.

When OFF is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.

ON

AUTO

MAX

MID

OFF c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/

–10dB/ –5dB/ 0dB d

Default: 0dB

Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range (during digital processing).

Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver (amp) or through to a TV. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this receiver.

0dB

+6dB

AMP

THROUGH

Setting

A.DELAY

(Auto delay)

<g>

What it does

This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an

HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time.

Option(s)

OFF

ON

C.WIDTH

(Center Width)

(Applicable only when using a center speaker)

<h>

DIMENSION

<h>

PANORAMA

<h>

C.GAIN

(Center Gain)

(Applicable only when using a center speaker)



EFFECT

H.GAIN

V.SB

(Virtual Surround

Back)

<j>

V.HEIGHT

(Virtual Height)

<k>

V.DEPTH

(Virtual Depth)

<l>

(Height Gain)

Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings). c 0 to 7

Default: d

3

Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings).

Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.

Adjusts the center gain to create a wider stereo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 1.0 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).

c –3 to +3 d

Default: 0

OFF

ON c 0 to 1.0 d

Defaults:

Neo:X CINEMA: 1.0

Neo:X MUSIC: 0.3

Neo:X GAME: 1.0

Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced

Surround or ALC mode (each mode can be set separately).

Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when listening in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode. If set to

HIGH, the sound from the top will be more emphasized.

When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information.

When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers.

ON

When this mode is selected, the sound field expands virtually to behind the display, resulting in a sound field with the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence.

OFF

MIN

MID

MAX c 10 to 90 d

Defaults:

EXT.STEREO: 90

Others: 50

LOW

MID

HIGH

OFF

OFF

ON

58 En

Using other functions 09 a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON .

b With the iPod/USB , HOME MEDIA GALLERY or ADAPTER PORT input function, by default S.RTRV

is set to

ON .

c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of effects depends on the listening mode.

d The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than

Dolby TrueHD.

e You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0dB .

f !

The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.

!

The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page

55.

g This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY

to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.

h Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.

i Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:X CINEMA/MUSIC/GAME mode.

j !

You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

!

You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to

NO or if the setting for not connecting surround back speakers is selected in the Speaker System settings.

k !

You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

!

You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO or if the setting for not connecting front height speakers is selected in the Speaker System settings. Also, the

Virtual Height mode cannot be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information.

l !

This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.

!

You can’t use the Virtual Depth mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

!

You can only use the Virtual Depth mode if the surround speakers are on.

Setting the Video options

There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

!

Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, setting and status of the receiver.

!

All of the setting items can be set for each input function.

!

Setting items other than V.CONV

can only be selected when V.CONV

is set to ON .

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press

VIDEO PARAMETER.

2 Use / j to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

3 Use / l to set as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Video parameter menu

Setting

V.CONV

(Digital Video Converter)

<a>

RES

(Resolution)



PCINEMA

(PureCinema)

<c, e>

P.MOTION

(Progressive Motion)

<c, e>

What it does Option(s)

ON

Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR

OUT jacks (including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types (see page 24).

OFF

Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch).

(“576p” indicates the 480p/576p resolution setting.)

This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it to AUTO . If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to

ON or OFF .

AUTO

PURE

576p

720p

1080i

1080p

1080/24p

AUTO

ON

OFF

Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive.

c –4 to +4

Default: 0 d

En 59


YNR

<d, e>

CNR

<d, e>

BNR

<d, e>

MNR

<d, e>

DETAIL

<d, e>

BRIGHT

(Brightness)

<d, e>

CONTRAST

<d, e>

HUE

<d, e>

CHROMA

(Chroma Level)

<d, e>

BLK SETUP

(Black Setup)

<f>

Setting

STREAM

(Stream Smoother)

<e>

V.ADJ

(Advanced Video

Adjust)

What it does

This improves elements that reduce picture quality mainly noticeable in network contents, such as mosquito noise and block noise.

When AUTO is selected, this unit’s Stream Smoother function automatically turns on when network contents are played on the player supporting Stream Smoother and connected to this unit by HDMI (assuming that integrated operation with the Control with HDMI function is set). (Stream Smoother Link)

Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that is connected. Select PDP for plasma displays,

LCD for liquid crystal monitors, FPJ for front projectors,

PRO for professional monitors. If you want to adjust the picture quality settings to your personal tastes, select

MEMORY .

Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.

Reduces noise in the input’s color (C) signal.

Reduces block noise (block-shaped distortion generated upon MPEG compression) in the picture.

Reduces mosquito noise (distortion generated at the contours of the picture upon MPEG compression) in the picture.

Option(s)

AUTO

ON

OFF

PDP

LCD

FPJ

PRO

MEMORY c 0 to +8 d

Default: 0 c 0 to +8 d



Default: 0

Adjusts how sharp edges appear.

c 0 to +8 d

Default: 0

Adjusts the overall brightness.

Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.

Adjusts the red/green balance.

Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.

c –6 to +6 d

Default: 0 c –6 to +6 d



Default: 0

Sets the black level according to the video input signal.

Normally select 0 . If the black level is too bright due to the combination with the connected monitor, select 7.5

.

0

7.5

60 En

Setting

ASP

(Aspect)

<g>

What it does

Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).

Option(s)

THROUGH

NORMAL a If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON , switch it OFF .

b !

When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.

!

When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input

(see About the video converter on page 24).

!

If this is set to something other than AUTO , PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals are output from the component output terminals.

c !

This setting is valid for component outputs and HDMI output.

!

P.MOTION

is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON .

!

This setting have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format (480i/576i or 1080i signals).

d Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ

(Advanced Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY .

e !

This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:

— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals

— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video signals f This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks.

g !

If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor.

!

This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.


Switching the speaker terminals

If you selected 9.1ch FH/FW ,

7.1ch + Speaker B , 7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2 or

5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp at Speaker system setting on page 87, you can switch between speakers using the SPEAKERS button.

If you selected 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp ,

7.1ch + ZONE 2 , 5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2 ,

5.1ch + ZONE 2+3 , 5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp or 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp , the button will simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off.

% Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a speaker system setting.

As mentioned above, if you have selected

7.1ch Front Bi-Amp , 7.1ch + ZONE 2 ,

5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2 , 5.1ch + ZONE 2+3 ,

5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp or 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp , the button will simply switch your main speaker terminal (A) on or off.

Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option:

When you select 9.1ch FH/FW , you can select from:

!

SP: FH/FW ON – Front height or front wide channels are added to the front, center, surround and surround back channels

(maximum 7 channels) and a maximum of 9 channels are output. The front height and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

!

SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added to the front, center, surround and surround back channels (maximum 7 channels) and a maximum of 9 channels are output.

!

SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added to the front, center, surround and surround back channels (maximum 7 channels) and a maximum of 9 channels are output.

!

SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers.

When you select 7.1ch + Speaker B , you can select from:

!

SP: A ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 9 channels

(including front height channels), depending on the source).

!

SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel sources will not be heard.

!

SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels, depending on the source), the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker terminals will be the same as the sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).

!


When you select 7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2 , you can select from:

!

SP: FH/FW ON – Front height or front wide channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

The front height and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

!

SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added to the front, center and surround channels

(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

!

SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added to the front, center and surround channels

(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

!


When you select 5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp , you can select from:

!

SP: A ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (maximum 5 channels).

!

SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel sources will not be heard.

!

SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker terminals will be the same as the sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).

!


Note

!

When 7.1ch + Speaker B or

5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp is selected for the

Speaker System setting (page 87) and the

Speaker B Link setting ( HDMI Setup on page

54) is turned on, the setting of the played speaker terminals switches automatically when HDMI OUT is switched. For details, see

Switching the HDMI output on page 62.

!

The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page

87. However, if SP: B ON is selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).

!

All speaker systems (except

7.1ch + Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls

The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on page 62.

1 Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.

Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:

!

ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary ( ZONE 2 ) sub zone

!

ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones

!

ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary

( ZONE 3 ) sub zone

!

MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-

ZONE feature off

The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the

MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.

2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the sub zone(s) you want.

If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 .

!

When the receiver is on, make sure that any operations for the sub zone are done while

ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the main zone only.

If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.

3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected.

For example, ZONE 2 DVD sends the source connected to the DVD inputs to the primary

( ZONE 2 ) sub room.

!

If you select TUNER , you can use the tuner controls to select a preset station (see Saving station presets on page 41 if you’re unsure how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.

4 When Speaker System is set to

7.1ch + ZONE 2, use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone.

En 61


62

5 When you’re finished, press

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.

You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).

!

You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the

MULTI-ZONE control first.

!

If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.

MULTI-ZONE remote controls

The following table shows the possible MULTI-

ZONE remote controls:

SC-LX85:

!

Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to operate the corresponding zone.

SC-LX75:

!

Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to operate the corresponding zone.

Button(s) What it does u

Switches on/off power in the sub zone.

INPUT

SELECT

Input function buttons

Use to select the input function in the sub zone.

Use to select the input function directly (this may not work for some functions) in the sub zone.

SC-LX85:

VOL + / –

<a>

SC-LX75:

MASTER

VOLUME

+ / –

<a>

Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.

Button(s) What it does

MUTE

<a>


a You can only use this button when Speaker System is set to 7.1ch + ZONE 2 .

Making an audio or a video recording

You can make an audio or a video recording from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).

Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the components you are recording to/from are hooked up in the same way (see

Connecting your equipment on page 14 for more on connections).

!

The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.

!

Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.

!

Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.

Since the video converter is not available when making recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must connect your recorder using Component video if your source has also been connected using

Component video.

1 Select the source you want to record.

Use the input function buttons (or

INPUT SELECT ).

2 Prepare the source you want to record.

Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video,

DVD etc.

En

3 Select the input signal according to the signal to be recorded.

Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.

4 Prepare the recorder.

Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording device and set the recording levels.

Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically-check the component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.

5 Start recording, then start playback of the source component.

Reducing the level of an analog signal

The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear distortion in the sound.

The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct

(ANALOG DIRECT) modes.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press A.ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off.

Using the sleep timer

The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.

30 min 60 min

Off 90 min

!

You can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options again.

!

The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.

Dimming the display

You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display.

!

You can also choose to turn the display off. In this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.

Switching the HDMI output

Set which terminal to use when outputting video and audio signals from the HDMI output terminals.

The HDMI OUT 1 terminal is compatible with the Control with HDMI function.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HDMI OUT.

Please wait a while when Please wait ...

is displayed.

The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL ,

HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed.


!

The synchronized amp mode is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch to

HDMI OUT 1 , then select the synchronized amp mode on the TV using the TV’s remote control.

About the Speaker B Link function

When 7.1ch + Speaker B or

5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp is selected for the

Speaker System setting (page 87) and the

Speaker B Link setting ( HDMI Setup on page

54) is turned on, the setting of the played speaker terminals switches automatically when

HDMI OUT is switched.

The settings switch as follows:

!

HDMI OUT ALL – Switches to SP: A+B ON .

Sound is output simultaneously in the room where the A speakers are located and in the room where the B speakers are located.

!

HDMI OUT 1 – Switches to SP: A ON . Sound is only output in the room where the A speakers are located.

!

HDMI OUT 2 – Switches to SP: B ON . Sound is only output in the room where the B speakers are located.

Checking your system settings

Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel processing and your current

MCACC preset.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press STATUS to check the system settings.

The front panel display shows each of the following settings for three seconds each: Input

Source d Sampling Frequency d MCACC preset d ZONE 2 input d ZONE 3 input d

HDMI OUT .

2 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to switch off the display.

Resetting the system

Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to

MULTI ZONE OFF .

!

Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from the receiver beforehand.

!

Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see HDMI

Setup on page 54).

1 Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d .

3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k / l , then press ENTER on the front panel.

The display shows RESET? OK .

4 Press ENTER to confirm.

OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver has been reset to the factory default settings.

!

Note that all settings will be saved, even if the receiver is unplugged.

Default system settings

Setting

Digital Video Converter

Default

ON

SPEAKERS

Speaker System

Speaker Setting

Surround Position

Crossover

X-Curve

DIMMER

Front

Center

FH/FW

Surr

SB

SW

FH/FW

9.1ch FH/FW

SMALL

SMALL

Inputs

See Input function default and possible settings on page 36.

HDMI

HDMI Audio

HDMI output

Amp

HDMI OUT

ALL

Control

Control Mode

Display Power Off

Audio playback

Power On Level

Volume Limit

Mute Level

Phase Control

SMALL

SMALL

SMALLx2

YES

IN REAR

80 Hz

OFF

Medium bright

ON

ALL

YES

LAST

OFF

FULL

ON

Auto Sound

Retriever iPod/USB,

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY,

ADAPTER PORT input function

Other input functions

ON

OFF

Setting Default

Sound Delay

Dual Mono

DRC

SACD Gain

LFE Attenuate

Auto delay

Digital Safety

0.0 frame

CH1

AUTO

0 dB

0 dB

OFF

OFF

ExtendedStereo 90

Effect Level

2 PL II Music

Options

Neo:X Options

Other modes

Center Width

Dimension

Panorama

Center Gain

50

3

0

OFF

Neo:X

CINEMA: 1.0

Neo:X

MUSIC: 0.3

Neo:X

GAME: 1.0

2 PL IIz Options Height Gain

Listening Mode

(2 ch/multi ch)

All Inputs

Listening Mode

(Headphones)

MID

AUTO

SURROUND

STEREO

See also Setting the Audio options on page 57 for other default DSP settings.

MCACC

MCACC Position Memory

Channel Level (M1 to M6)

Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)

Standing Wave

(M1 to M6)

EQ Data (M1 to M6)

M1:

MEMORY 1

0.0 dB

3.00 m

ATT of all channels/filters

0.0 dB

SWch Wide Trim 0.0 dB

All channels/ bands

0.0 dB

EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB

En 63

10 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

Controlling the rest of your system


64

About the Remote Setup menu

Important

!

This section includes explanations for the SC-

LX85’s remote control. For instructions for the

SC-LX75’s remote control, see Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX75) on page

74.

The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the HOME MENU button while pressing

MULTI OPERATION . The different items on the

Remote Setup menu are described below. For their setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the respective items.

Setting What it does

PRESET

RECALL

Preset codes can be set for the various input functions. The remote control codes of a number of other devices

(including products of other brands) are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated.

See Selecting preset codes directly on page 65.

CODE

LEARNING

MULTI

OPERATE

If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes, the remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly. See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 65.

A series of the remote control operations for starting listening or viewing can be programmed. Multiple remote control codes can be set for the different input functions. See Multi Operation and System Off on page 67.


SYSTEM

OFF

This is a function for automatically turning off the power of devices connected to the receiver. Multiple remote control codes can be set, as desired.

See Multi Operation and System Off on page 67.

DIRECT

FUNC

RENAME

SYNC

RENAMING

ERASE

LEARNING

IR/RF

SELECT

This is a setting for changing only the remote control unit’s operation screen, without changing the receiver’s input, when the remote control unit’s input function buttons are pressed. This is convenient for using the remote control unit for devices not connected to the receiver. See Direct function on page 66.

The names of the input function buttons displayed on the remote control unit can be changed as desired. See

Renaming input function names manually on page 66.

Input function names changed on the receiver can be acquired by the remote control unit so that the names are the same on the remote control unit. See

Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver on page 72.

This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned.

Codes learned for the different input functions can be erased individually.

See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 66.

This function is for selecting wireless

(RF) or infrared (IR) as the remote control operating mode for the different devices. See Operating this receiver by

RF communications on page 71 and

Operating other components by RF communications on page 71.

En


OPERATION

MODE

KEY RESET

ALL RESET

READ

PRESET ID

CHANGE

RC MODE

The remote control unit’s operation screen switches automatically when the receiver’s input is switched (This is only valid when the operation selector switch is set to SOURCE ). See Setting the remote control operation mode on page 72.

This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set. Key resetting can be done for individual input functions. See Resetting the input assignment of one of the input function buttons on page 66.

This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon shipment from the factory. See Resetting the remote control settings on page 66.

The preset codes set for the different input functions can be checked. See

Confirming preset codes on page 66.

If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, amplifiers, etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units from operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated. See Operating multiple receivers on page 64.

EXIT

SETUP

Exits the setup menu.

is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting.

!

This function is only valid when RECEIVER is set to IR MODE at the remote control’s

IR/RF SELECT setting (page 71).

!

Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function (see Remote Control Mode

Setup on page 92).

1 Check that the remote control’s

MULTI-ZONE selector switch is set to MAIN and that the operation selector switch is set to RECEIVER.

2 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU .

3 Use / j to select ‘CHANGE RC MODE’, then press ENTER.

4 Use / j to select the remote mode.

RC MODE 1 to 4 can be selected.

5 Press ENTER to set the remote mode.

The selected mode flashes for 3 seconds.

To operate another receiver, start over from step

1 to input its preset code.

Note

!

You can cancel or exit any of the steps by press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds. To go back a step, press RETURN .

!

After one minute of inactivity, the remote automatically exits the operation.

Operating multiple receivers

The remote control included with this receiver can be used to operate up to three other receivers (of the same model as this receiver) in addition to this receiver. The receiver to be operated

Setting the remote to control other components

Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD ) using the component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.

However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 65).

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85) 10

!

For greater convenience, assign the TV connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV operation selector switch, and assign your satellite/cable receiver or set-top box connected to the TV/SAT input terminal to the TV input button. If a single device is connected to both terminals, that device should be assigned to both the TV operation selector switch and TV input buttons.

!

Devices may be assigned to the following input function buttons.

RECEIVER

MAIN

BD

TV

USB iPod

PHONO

AUX

SOURCE

ZONE2

DVD

CD

3

MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

DVR HDMI

NET RADIO

HMG ADAPTER

TUNER 1

OPTION

MULTI CH

IN VIDEO

INPUT SELECT

2

CD-R

Selecting preset codes directly



2 Use / j to select ‘PRESET RECALL’, then press ENTER.

3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control, then press ENTER.

When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL , set the remote control operation selector switch to TV here.

The remote display shows the component you want to control (for example DVD or TV ).

!

You can’t assign TUNER , HMG NET RADIO ,

ADAPTER and iPod USB .

4 Use / j to select the first letter of the brand name of your component, then press ENTER.

This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P for Pioneer).

5 Use / j to select the manufacturer’s name from the list, then press ENTER.

6 Use / j to select the proper code from the list, then try using this remote with your component.

The code should start with the component type

(for example, DVD 020 ). If there is more than one, start with the first one.

To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing u

SOURCE . If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).

!

If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 65).

!

When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR 450 , 451 or 452 .

!

When using a Pioneer flat panel TV released prior to summer 2005, please select preset code 644 .

7 If your component is controlled successfully, press ENTER to confirm.

The remote display shows OK .

The remote can store about 200 preset codes

(this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).

Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available are shown below:

RECEIVER

MAIN

BD

TV

USB iPod

PHONO

SOURCE

ZONE2

DVD

3

MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

DVR HDMI

CD

NET RADIO

HMG ADAPTER

1

OPTION

2 TUNER

MULTI CH

IN VIDEO

INPUT SELECT

CD-R

LIGHT

AUX

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET ENTER

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

RETURN

PTY SEARCH

CH LEVEL


AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU


CH

TV

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

VOL


A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

CH

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE MUTE

Programming signals from other remote controls

If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code.



2 Use / j to select ‘CODE LEARNING’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the component you want to control (for example DVD or TV ).


PRESS KEY blinks in the remote display.

!

You can’t assign TUNER , HMG NET RADIO ,

ADAPTER and iPod USB .

!

The buttons ( u , VOL +/– ,

CH +/– , MUTE and INPUT ) can only be learned after the operation selection switch is set to TV .

4 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.

PRESS KEY lights continuously to indicate the remote is ready to accept a signal.

!

The remote controls should be 3 cm apart.

3 cm

Other remote control

This receiver’s remote control

5 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending

(teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.

For example, if you want to learn the playback control signal, press and hold d briefly. The remote display will shows OK if the operation has been learned.

If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the remote display will shows ERROR briefly, and then display PRESS KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching) button as you vary the distance between the two remotes, until the remote display shows OK .

6 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 4 and 5.

To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 1 through 5.

7 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation(s).

En 65


66

Note

!

Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.

!

Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.

!

If the remote display shows MEMORY FULL , it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page

66 to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).

!

Depending on the type of command that has been learned, operation may not be possible with RF two-way communications. In this case, operate using IR signal transmission.

For instructions on switching between the IR and RF modes, see Operating other components by RF communications on page

71.

Erasing one of the remote control button settings

This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.



2 Use / j to select ‘ERASE LEARNING’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased.

3 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased, then press ENTER.

The remote display flashes PRESS KEY .

4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two seconds.

The remote display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the button has been erased.

5 Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.

6 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds when you’re done.

Resetting the input assignment of one of the input function buttons

This procedure resets the input assignment preset at the remote control’s input function button, restoring the default.



2 Use / j to select ‘KEY RESET’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased.

3 Press the input function button for the component whose input assignment you want to reset, then press and hold ENTER for a couple of seconds.

The remote display shows OK when the input assignment of the remote control’s input function button is reset.

Resetting the remote control settings

Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s settings to the factory default.

When preset codes are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.



2 Use / j to select ‘ALL RESET’, then press ENTER.

ALL RESET flashes in the remote display.

3 Press and hold ENTER for about two seconds.

The remote display shows OK to confirm the remote presets have been erased.

Confirming preset codes

Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned to an input function button.



2 Use / j to select ‘READ PRESET ID’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the input function button you want to check.

3 Press the input function button of the component for which you want to check the preset code, then press ENTER.

The brand name and preset code appears in the display for three seconds.

Renaming input function names manually

You can customize the names that appear on the remote display when you select an input function (for example, you could change the name of DVR/BDR to DVR-LX61).



2 Use / j to select ‘RENAME’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the button of the input function you want to rename.

3 Press the input function button you want to rename then press ENTER.

The TV CONTROL name can be changed when the remote control operation selector switch is switched to TV . To change the names of the input functions, set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE .

4 Use / j to select ‘NAME EDIT’, then press ENTER.

To reset the button to its original (default) name, select NAME RESET above.

5 Edit the name of the input function in the remote control display, pressing

ENTER when you’re finished.

Use i / j to change the character and k / l to move forward/back a position. The name can be up to 14 characters.

Direct function

!

Default setting: ON

You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let you, for example, use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then

En

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85) 10 use the remote control to rewind a tape in your

VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player.

When direct function is on, any component you select (using the input function buttons) will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control without affecting the receiver.



2 Use / j to select ‘DIRECT FUNC’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the button of the input function you want to control.


!

You can’t use direct function TUNER , HMG

NET RADIO , ADAPTER and iPod USB .

4 Use / j to switch direct function ON or OFF, then press ENTER.

The remote display shows OK to confirm the setting.

Multi Operation and System

Off

The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 6 commands for the components in your system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using only two buttons on the remote control.

Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use one button to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time.

!

Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see

Setting the remote to control other components on page 64 for more on this).

!

Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.

!

Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.

!

Up to 5 commands can be programmed for

System Off.

Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence

Set the remote control operation mode selector switch to RECEIVER when you want to program this receiver’s operations, to SOURCE when you want to program operations of other components.



2 Use / j to select ‘MULTI OPERATE’ or ‘SYSTEM OFF’ from the menu and press

ENTER.

If you selected Multi Operation

( MULTI OPERATE ), the remote display prompts you for an input function button.

If you selected System Off ( SYSTEM OFF ), go to step 4.

3 Press the input function button for the component that will start the multioperation, then press ENTER.

For example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD .

4 Use / j to select ‘EDIT CODE’, then press ENTER.

To erase any previously stored multi-operations

(or shutdown sequences) select CLEAR CODE above.

5 Use / j to select a command in the sequence, then press ENTER.

If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST CODE . Otherwise, simply choose the next command in the sequence. PRESS KEY flashes after you press ENTER .

6 If necessary, press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input.

This is only necessary if the command is for a new component (input function).

7 Select the button for the command you want to input.

The following remote control commands can be selected:

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

RECEIVER

MAIN

BD

TV

USB iPod

PHONO

SOURCE

ZONE2

DVD

3

MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

DVR HDMI

NET RADIO

HMG ADAPTER CD

TUNER 1

OPTION

MULTI CH

IN VIDEO

INPUT SELECT

2

CD-R

LIGHT

AUX

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET ENTER

CATEGORY

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

THX MPX

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

RETURN

PTY SEARCH

CH LEVEL

PQLS MEMORY

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU


CH

TV

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

VOL


A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

CH

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE MUTE

8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to program a sequence of commands.

9 When you’re finished, use i / j to select ‘EDIT EXIT’ from the menu and press

ENTER.

You will return to the remote control Setup menu. Select EXIT SETUP to exit.

Using multi operations

You can start multi operations with the receiver switched on, or in standby.

RECEIVER

MAIN

BD

TV

USB iPod

SOURCE

ZONE2

DVD

CD

TUNER

MULTI CH

3

MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

DVR HDMI

NET RADIO

HMG ADAPTER

1

OPTION

2

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

MULTI OPERATE flashes in the display.

2 Press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation.

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.

!

With this remote control, the IR and RF modes can be selected separately for the individual input functions. To perform a multi operation on a device (input function) for which the IR mode is selected, point the remote control toward the remote sensor on that device.

!

You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on or off. This is done automatically.

With Pioneer components , you don’t need to:

!

program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence (except DVD recorders);

These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).

En 67


Using System off

RECEIVER

MAIN

BD

TV

USB iPod

SOURCE

ZONE2

DVD

CD

TUNER

MULTI CH

3

MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

DVR HDMI

NET RADIO

HMG ADAPTER

1

OPTION

2


MULTI OPERATE flashes in the display.

2 Press SOURCE.

The command sequence you programmed will run, then all Pioneer components will switch off, followed by this receiver.

!

In order to avoid accidently switching off a

DVD recorder that is currently recording, no

DVD recorder power off codes are sent.

!

With this remote control, the IR and RF modes can be selected separately for the individual input functions. To turn off the power of a device (input function) for which the IR mode is selected using the System Off function, point the remote control toward the remote sensor on that device.

!

When the power code of another brand is registered, the power on/off operation may be inverted. When using the System Off function for a multi operation including the power codes of other brands, always check that the power of all the components has turned off.

Controlling components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Selecting preset codes directly on page 65). Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE , then press the input function buttons to select the component.

!

TV CONTROL on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the

TV operation selector switch. If you have two

TVs, assign the main TV to the TV operation selector switch.

RECEIVER

BD

TV

USB iPod

PHONO

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

3

MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

DVR HDMI DVD

CD

NET RADIO

HMG ADAPTER

TUNER 1

OPTION

MULTI CH

IN VIDEO

INPUT SELECT

2

CD-R

LIGHT

AUX

CH

TV

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

VOL

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

TOOLS

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET ENTER

CATEGORY

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

RETURN

PTY SEARCH

CH LEVEL


PGM

STEREO

MENU



A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

CH

68 En


TV and Audio/Video components

Button(s) u SOURCE

Number buttons

!

/CLR

ENTER (CLASS) i / j / k / l

ENTER

TV

POWER ON/

OFF numerics k (dot)

CH ENTER

EXIT/INFO numerics

KURO LINK

CH ENTER

TOOLS/GUIDE USER MENU i / j / k / l

ENTER

TV (Monitor)

POWER ON/OFF

EXIT i / j / k / l

ENTER

HOME MENU HOME MENU

BD/DVD

POWER

ON/OFF numerics

CLEAR

ENTER

TOP MENU

HDD/

BDR/DVR

POWER

ON/OFF numerics

+

CLEAR

TOP MENU/

DISC NAVI

VCR

POWER

ON/OFF numerics

—

—

—

TOOLS

<a>

HOME

MENU

GUIDE

HOME

MENU

— i / j / k / l i / j / k / l —

ENTER ENTER —

—

PGM (Red)

MENU (Green)

(Yellow)

RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

RETURN

—

—

—

RETURN

HDD/DVD

MENU

VCR

—

—

—

— d e g

(Blue) m n o p

AUDIO

Blue

—

—

—

—

—

ANT

—

AUDIO

Blue

—

AUTO SETUP

FREEZE

—

—

AV SELECTION

SCREEN SIZE

AUDIO

MENU d e g m n o p

AUDIO

TV/DTV d e g m n o p

AUDIO

— d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISP DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY —

CH +/– CH +/– g + n a Controls for BD.

—

CH +/–

—

DISPLAY

OUTPUT

RESOLU-

TION +/–

<a>

—

CH +/–

—

CH +/–

—

CH +/–

RECORD

SAT/

CATV

POWER

ON/OFF numerics

*

ENTER

LIST

GUIDE i / j / k / l

ENTER

HOME

RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue d

C/ e

D/ g

A/ m n

B/ o

E/ p

AUDIO

DISPLAY/

INFO

Audio/Video components


Number buttons

!

/CLR

ENTER (CLASS)

LD

POWER ON/OFF numerics

+10

ENTER

TOP MENU i / j / k / l

ENTER

PGM (Red)

(Yellow)

(Blue) d e g m n o

— i / j / k / l

ENTER

—

RETURN

—

—

— d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISP a Controls for MD.

b Controls for SACD.

c Controls for DAT.

p

AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

CD/CD-R/

SACD


>10/CLEAR

DISC/ENTER

—

LEGATO LINK



—

—

SACD SETUP



—

PROGRAM

REPEAT

SHUFFLE d e g m n o p

PURE AUDIO



TIME



MD/DAT


CLEAR

<a>

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

— d e g m n o /MS–

<c> p /MS+

<c>

—

— p

—

—

TAPE

POWER ON/OFF

—

CLEAR

ENTER

—

— e / g / m / n t

—

—

—

—

— d e g m n o

En 69

10 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85) m d n o e g p

AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

TV (Projector)

Button(s)

8

9

6

7

2

3

4

5 u SOURCE

1

0

!

/CLR


ENTER

INFO i / j / k / l

ENTER

TEST

HIDE

MENU

HDMI1

HDMI2

COMP.

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

BRIGHT–

BRIGHT+

POWER OFF

ASPECT

CONTRAST+/–

TV (Projector)

POWER ON

MOVIE

STANDARD

DYNAMIC

USER1

USER2

USER3

COLOR+

SHARP+

GAMMA

COLOR–

SHARP–

COLOR TEMP

EXIT

70 En

Using the RF communications function

IR blaster (only required when you want to operate other components by

RF two-way communications) (max. 4 components)

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

IR

CU-RF100 OUT

(OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX)

Receiver

IN

IN

Operation of the receiver or other components placed in a rack is possible

Operation is possible in any direction the remote control is pointed (360°)

Remote control operation

RF Adapter

With this receiver, two-way communications between the receiver and remote control are possible by connecting the included RF adapter to the RS-232C and CU-RF100 terminals. For instructions on connecting the RF adapter, see

Connecting the RF adapter on page 15. Two-way communications allow you to use the following functions:

!

The receiver can be operated by pointing the remote control in any direction (360º)

(maximum line-of-sight distance for two-way communications: about 10 meters).

!

Operate is possible without being affected by obstacles (even products in racks can be operated).

!

The information shown on the receiver’s display can be displayed on the remote control’s display as you operate.

!

RF communications can be used to operate up to 4 other components connected to the receiver (using the included IR blaster. For details, see Operating other components by RF communications on page 71).

!

The remote control input display names can be synchronized with the input names changed at Input Name on the receiver’s

Input Setup menu (page 36) and acquired automatically. For details, see Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver on page 72.


!

When the receiver’s input is switched, the remote control’s display and operating mode switch to that input automatically. For details, see Setting the remote to control other components on page 64.

Important

!

The line-of-sight communications distance is a rough indication, and may differ according to the surrounding environment.

!

Depending on the communications environment, functions using two-way communications between the receiver and remote control may not operate properly.

For details, including cautions on the communications environment and usage procedure, etc., see Precautions when using the Omni-Directional RF Remote Control on page 72.

4 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press VIDEO PARAMETER on the remote control.

The remote display shows PAIRING .

5 Press ENTER on the remote control.

AUTHORIZATION flashes and pairing is performed. When pairing is successful, SUCCESS is displayed and pairing is completed. RF adapter’s LED lights green.

If ERROR is displayed, pairing has not been successful. Check the connections and distance with the RF adapter, then start over from step 1.

The remote control unit’s receiver operation mode must be set to “RF” in order to operate the receiver with RF two-way communications.

Make this setting as described at Operating this receiver by RF communications on page 71.

Note

!

You can cancel or exit any of the steps by press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds. To go back a step, press RETURN .

Pairing the RF adapter and remote control

Pairing is necessary in order to use the RF communications function. Perform the operation below after connecting the RF adapter and receiver.

1 Switch on the receiver.

2 Set the RF Remote Setup on this receiver’s Other Setup menu to ON.

For details, see RF Remote Setup on page 92.

3 Press the SETTING button on the front of the RF adapter.

RF adapter’s LED blinks red.

Operating this receiver by RF communications

Use this procedure to make the remote control settings to operate the receiver using RF two-way communications. The settings can be made individually for the main zone, ZONE

2 and ZONE 3. Connect the receiver and RF adapter and pair the RF adapter and remote control unit beforehand.



2 Use / j to select ‘IR/RF SELECT’, then press ENTER.

Check that the units are paired. If

RECEIVER MAIN is displayed, pairing has been performed properly, so proceed to step 3. If

RF MODE ONLY flashes, pairing has not been performed properly, so perform this procedure again after performing pairing (see Pairing the

RF adapter and remote control on page 71).

3 Use / j to select the receiver zone for which you want to use RF two-way communications, then press ENTER.

4 Use / j to select ‘RF MODE’, then press ENTER.

Select IR MODE to return to operation by infrared signal.

When RECEIVER is selected and RF MODE is set at step 3, HMG NET RADIO , ADAPTER , iPod USB and TUNER are automatically set to the RF mode. Note that RF MODE cannot be set for OPTION 1 and OPTION 2 .

5 If you want to operate other zones with RF two-way communications, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Operating other components by RF communications

Up to 4 other components connected to the receiver can be operated by RF communications. Use the IR blaster to communicate between the RF adapter and other components, and switch the remote control’s setting to RF.

The remote control’s setting can be switched individually for each input.

To mount on a shelf above the component

Double-faced tape

Rack

Remote control sensor

To mount on the component

Doublefaced tape

Remote control sensor

1 Connect the IR blaster cable to the RF

Adapter’s IR Blaster terminal and mount the transmitter on the component you want to operate with RF communications.

RF adapter

En 71


72

!

Operation is not possible unless the IR blaster is mounted in an appropriate position. Whenever possible, mount it above the other component’s remote control sensor. If mounted below, the influence of external light, etc., could hamper reception.

!

Mount the IR blaster securely to a position near the other component’s remote control sensor. For the location of the other component’s remote control sensor, see the component’s operating instructions.

!

Clean any dirt or dust off the place at which the double-faced tape is to be attached beforehand.

!

Note that the double-faced tape is strong, and that trying to peel it off the shelf, etc., after it has been applied may damage the shelf’s surface.



3 Use / j to select ‘IR/RF SELECT’, then press ENTER.


RECEIVER MAIN MAIN is displayed, pairing has been performed properly, so proceed to step

4. If RF MODE ONLY flashes, pairing has not been performed properly, so perform this procedure again after performing pairing (see Pairing the RF adapter and remote control on page 71).

4 Use / j to select input function for the component you want to operate using

RF communications, then press ENTER.

Select the input component to which the IR blaster was mounted in step 1.

5 Use / j to select ‘RF MODE’, then press ENTER.

Select IR MODE to return to operation by infrared signal.

6 If other input function buttons also switch to RF communications operation, repeat step 4 to 5.

En


Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver

!

Default setting: MANUAL

The remote control input display names can be synchronized with the input names that have been changed at Input Name on the receiver’s

Input Setup menu (page 36) and acquired automatically. There are two modes: AUTO in which the receiver’s input names are acquired automatically each time the input is switched, and MANUAL in which the receiver’s input names are only acquired for input functions selected manually. Even when input names are changed manually at Renaming input function names manually on page 66, when synchro renaming is performed here, the input name is overwritten.



2 Use / j to select ‘SYNC RENAMING’, then press ENTER.

MANUAL flashes in the remote display.

If RF MODE ONLY flashes, pairing has not been performed properly or RECEIVER may be set to IR MODE at the remote control’s

IR/RF SELECT setting. In this case, perform pairing, then switch RECEIVER to RF MODE at the remote control’s IR/RF SELECT setting. For details, see Pairing the RF adapter and remote control on page 71 and Operating this receiver by

RF communications on page 71.

3 Use / j to select ‘AUTO’ or

‘MANUAL’, then press ENTER.

If you selected AUTO , this completes the setting. The receiver’s input names are acquired automatically in synchrony with the receiver each time the remote control’s input is switched. Proceed to step 7.

If you selected MANUAL , go to step 4.

4 Press the input function button for the component whose receiver input name you want to acquire, then press ENTER.

The receiver’s input name is acquired. After

PLEASE WAIT is displayed, the receiver’s input name flashes. If the name has not been changed at Input Name on the receiver’s

Input Setup menu (page 36), NO CHANGE flashes.

The HDMI input function button is not supported.

5 Press ENTER to enter the input name displayed on the remote control.

COMPLETE is displayed and the input name is registered.

6 To acquire the receiver input names for other input function buttons, repeat step

4 to 5.


receiver’s input does not switch and only the remote control unit’s operating screen switches.

!

The remote control operation mode is only valid when the remote control operation selector switch is set to SOURCE .



2 Use / j to select ‘OPERATION MODE’, then press ENTER.


SYNCHRO ON is displayed, pairing has been performed properly, so proceed to step 3. If

RF MODE ONLY flashes, pairing has not been performed properly, so perform this procedure again after performing pairing (see Pairing the


3 Use / j to select ‘SYNCHRO ON’ or

‘SYNCHRO OFF’, then press ENTER.

The remote display shows OK to confirm the setting.


Setting the remote control operation mode

!

Default setting: SYNCHRO ON

When the remote control operation mode is turned on and the receiver’s input is switched, the remote control display and operation mode switch automatically to that input. Select

SYNCHRO OFF if you do not want the remote control’s function to switch automatically when the receiver’s input is switched.

!

When the remote control’s input is switched, the receiver’s input also switches, but for functions for which the remote control direct function (page 66) is set to off, when the remote control’s input is switched, the

Precautions when using the

Omni-Directional RF Remote

Control

Precautions regarding wavelength

!

This remote control is designed to prevent other persons from eavesdropping on the transmitted signals, but precautions should nonetheless be taken against the chance that other persons’ could intercept and listen to the signals transmitted. Given that this remote control produces radio wave transmissions, another person could deliberately use

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85) 10 a receiver to attempt to intercept such transmissions. As a result, this device should not be used to play important transmissions demanding privacy.

This remote control utilizes the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This band is also used by a variety of other devices as noted below. In particular, devices not often cognizant to the user are listed in item 2.

1 Examples of common devices utilizing the 2.4 GHz band:

!

Cordless phone

!

Cordless facsimile

!

Microwave oven

!

Wireless LAN router

!

Wireless AV device

!

Wireless controllers for games

!

Microwave therapeutic devices

!

Bluetooth wireless technology devices

2 Other devices using 2.4 GHz:

!

Shoplifting-prevention systems

!

Amateur wireless radio

!

Distribution control systems at factories and warehouses

!

Railway and emergency vehicle wireless identification systems

When such devices are used simultaneously with this remote control, signal interference may occur, resulting in signal dropouts.

To improve reception quality, try the following:

!

Turn off the other device emitting radio waves.

!

Place the interfering device farther away

(Move both the remote control and RF adapter away from the interfering device).

Do not use this remote control in the following locations, since transmission interruption may result:

!

Locations where another device using the same 2.4 GHz frequency is being used, such as a Bluetooth wireless technology device or wireless LAN, or in the vicinity where the magnetic field, static electricity, or radio wave interference from another device may occur (depending on the environment, radio waves may not transmit effectively).

!

Move the radio farther away.

!

If visual noise appears on the television screen, it is possible that this remote control is producing adverse influence on the antenna input of the television, video device,

BS tuner, or CS tuner. Move this remote control farther away from the antenna input of the affected device.

Usable range

!

Designed for use only within private homes

(signal transmission distance may be reduced due to room design or conditions).

In the following cases, this remote control cannot operate due to poor or erratic radio wave transmission.

!

When signal transmission is blocked by a wall or floor constructed of ferro-concrete or metal.

!

Nearby large metal furniture objects.

!

In large crowds of people, or near obstructive buildings.

!

Locations where another device using the same 2.4 GHz frequency is being used, such as a Bluetooth wireless technology device or wireless LAN, or in the vicinity where the magnetic field, static electricity, or radio wave interference from another device may occur.

!

When living in a housing complex (apartment, condominium, etc.) where the next-door unit has a microwave oven located near to this remote control. Note that even a microwave oven will not interfere with this remote control when not in use.

!

When using multiple Omni-Directional RF

Remote Control in the same location.

Signal reflection

!

The signals reaching the remote control include those transmitted in a straight line from the main unit (direct waves), and those that are received after being bounced off of walls, furniture, and other buildings (reflected waves).

As a result, reflected waves can be generated by obstacles and other reflective objects, causing variations in the signal quality. In such cases, try slightly changing the position of the remote control.

CAUTION

!

With the exception of cases determined by law to be the subject of legal liability,

Pioneer refuses all responsibility for any harm resulting to the customer or other person as a result of the use of this remote control.

For safe use

!

Do not use near electronic devices utilizing high-precision or very delicate radio waves, since the other device may operate incorrectly, resulting in malfunction.

Examples of devices requiring particular caution:

!

Hearing aids, pacemakers and other medical or therapeutic electronic devices, fire/smoke detectors, automatic door openers, other automatic devices.

!

Persons using pacemakers or other medical or therapeutic electronic devices should consult the manufacturer or dealer of their device regarding the potential effects of radio waves from this remote control.

!

Do not use in aircraft, hospitals, or other locations where the use of radio-wavegenerating devices is prohibited, since adverse affects may be caused to flight communications equipment or medical devices. Follow all precautions and directives given by medical institutions.

En 73


Controlling the rest of your system


About the Remote Setup menu

Important

!

This section includes explanations for the SC-

LX75’s remote control. For instructions for the

SC-LX85’s remote control, see Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85) on page

64.

The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing RCU SETUP . The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below. For their setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the respective items.


Preset recall

Preset codes can be set for the various input functions. The remote control codes of a number of other devices

(including products of other brands) are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated.

See Selecting preset codes directly on page 75.

Code learning

Multi operation

If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes, the remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly. See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 75.

A series of the remote control operations for starting listening or viewing can be programmed. Multiple remote control codes can be set for the different input functions. See Multi Operation and System Off on page 76.


System off

This is a function for automatically turning off the power of devices connected to the receiver. Multiple remote control codes can be set, as desired.

See Multi Operation and System Off on page 76.

Direct function

Erase learning

Back light

Reset function

All reset

This is a setting for changing only the remote control unit’s operation screen, without changing the receiver’s input, when the remote control unit’s input function buttons are pressed. This is convenient for using the remote control unit for devices not connected to the receiver. See Direct function on page 76.

This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned.

Codes learned for the different input functions can be erased individually.

See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 75.

The backlight lighting pattern can be selected from among four modes, in consideration of convenience and battery service life. See Setting the backlight mode on page 76.

This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set. Key resetting can be done for individual input functions. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 75.

This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon shipment from the factory. See Resetting the remote control settings on page 77.


Change

RC mode

If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, amplifiers, etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units from operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated. See Operating multiple receivers on page 74.

Note

!

You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing RCU SETUP .

!

After one minute of inactivity, the remote automatically exits the operation.

Operating multiple receivers

Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this receiver’s remote control when using multiple receivers, provided they are of the same model as this receiver. The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting.

!

Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function (see Remote Control Mode

Setup on page 92).

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press

‘4’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once.

The LED continues to flash.

!

To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP .

2 Press the number button for the receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you wish to operate.

For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘ 2 ’.

If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.

When the preset code is input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed.

Setting the remote to control other components

Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD ) using the component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.

However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.


!

For greater convenience, assign the TV connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV CTRL button, and assign your satellite/ cable receiver or set-top box connected to the

TV/SAT input terminal to the TV/SAT input button. If a single device is connected to both terminals, that device should be assigned to both the TV CTRL and TV/SAT input buttons.

!

Devices may be assigned to the following input function buttons.

SOURCE

RCU SETUP

DVD

BDR

DVR BD

SAT

TV

USB iPod

CD

TUNER

INPUT SELECT

HDMI

HMG ADPT

OPTION

VIDEO


74 En


Selecting preset codes directly





!


RCU SETUP .

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL , press TV CTRL here.

The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

3 Use the number buttons to enter the

4-digit preset code.

See Preset code list on page 116.


When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this happens, enter the 4-digit preset code again.

4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control.

To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing u

SOURCE . If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).

5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset setup mode.

Programming signals from other remote controls

If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code.

The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).

Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available are shown below:

SOURCE

RCU SETUP

DVD

BDR

DVR BD

SAT

TV CD

USB iPod TUNER

INPUT SELECT

HMG

HDMI

ADPT

OPTION

VIDEO


INPUT

TV CONTROL

CH VOL MUTE

LIST TUNE TOOLS



HOME

MENU TUNE

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

HDD

PGM

STEREO

DVD

STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR



HDMI OUT

1 3


4 5 6


7 8 9

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

ZONE 2

0

ZONE 3

CLASS

ENTER

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

CH

LIGHT





!


RCU SETUP .



3 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.

The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, remaining lit.

!

The remote controls should be 3 cm apart.

3 cm

This receiver’s remote control

Other remote control

4 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending

(teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.


!

If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 75 to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory

(note that some signals may take more memory than others).

!

Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.

!

Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.

5 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4.

To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 2 through 4.

6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.

Erasing one of the remote control button settings

This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.





!


RCU SETUP .

2 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased, then press ENTER.

The LED flashes once.

3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.

5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing mode.

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function

This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input function, and restores the factory default.

This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used.





!


RCU SETUP .

En 75


76

2 Press and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for three seconds.


Direct function

!

Default setting: On

You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let you, for example, use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your

VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player.

When direct function is on, any component you select (using the input function buttons) will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control without affecting the receiver.





!


RCU SETUP .


3 Press ‘1’ (On) or ‘0’ (Off) to switch the direct function mode.


If the LED flashes three times, the setting has failed.

4 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.

Setting the backlight mode

!

Default setting: 1 (normal mode)

The backlight lighting pattern can be selected from among four modes, in consideration of convenience and battery service life.





!


RCU SETUP .

2 Press the number button for the backlight mode you want to set.

!

‘ 1 ’ (normal mode) – The backlight is turned on and off with the light button. After it lights, it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds.

!

‘ 2 ’ (frequent lighting mode) – The backlight turns on when any button on the remote control is pressed. It is turned off with the light button. After it lights, it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for

10 seconds.

!

‘ 3 ’ (eco mode) – The backlight is turned on and off with the light button. After it lights, it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for 5 seconds.

!

‘ 4 ’ (off mode) – The backlight does not turn on even when the light button is pressed.


If the LED flashes three times, the setting has failed.

3 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.

Multi Operation and System

Off

The Multi operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 5 commands for the components in your system.

!

Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices or perform programming signals for other remote controls before multi operation memory programming (page 75).

The Multi operation feature makes it easy to perform the following operations by pressing just two buttons.

Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD input function button to:

1. Switch this receiver on.

2. Switch this receiver’s input to DVD.

3. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed commands.

Similar to Multi operations, System off allows you to use two buttons to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time. Only one System off operation sequence may be programmed.

Press MULTI OPERATION and then u SOURCE to:

1. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed commands.

2. Switch off all Pioneer devices including the receiver (except DVD recorders and VCRs).

For greater convenience, program this receiver to perform power on/off and playback operations on non-Pioneer devices as well. (The signals for Pioneer devices described above are not contingent on programming for non-

Pioneer devices.)

The buttons that can be programmed using

Multi operation or System off are the same buttons as those that can be programmed for other remote controls (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 75).

Note

!

Before Multi operation and System off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see

Setting the remote to control other components on page 74 for more on this).

!

Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.

!

Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.

!

Some remote controllers for other manufacturers’ devices use the same signals for switching the power on and off. In some cases, even if this receiver is programmed to perform these commands, power to the non-

Pioneer devices may not be switched on and off correctly. Program the receiver to perform these commands if the non-Pioneer device uses separate signals for power on/off.

Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence





!


RCU SETUP .

2 Press the input function button (or u

SOURCE button).

For Multi operations , press the input function you wish to program (for example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD ).

!

With Multi operation, the HDMI and TV CTRL settings cannot be made. For other settable input functions, see Setting the remote to control other components on page 74.

For System off , press the u SOURCE button.

The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously.

En


3 If necessary, press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input.

This is only necessary if the command is for a new component (input function).

4 Select the button for the command you want to input.


!

You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on or off. This is done automatically.

With Pioneer components, you don’t need to program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence (except DVD recorders).

5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a sequence of up to five commands.

If you press RCU SETUP before programming is completed, commands programmed up to that point will be stored.

6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.

Using multi operations




2 Within five seconds, press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation.

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.

Using System off




2 Within five seconds, press u SOURCE.

The command sequence you programmed will run, then all Pioneer components will switch off, followed by this receiver (switch of all the zones becomes off).

!

In order to avoid accidently switching off a

DVD recorder that is currently recording, no

DVD recorder power off codes are sent.

Erasing the settings for the multi-operation

This erases all the settings programmed in the remote control for the multi-operation.





!


RCU SETUP .

2 Press the input function button containing the program you want to cancel or the u SOURCE button for three seconds.


Default preset codes

Input function button

DVD

BD

DVR/BDR

HDMI

TV/SAT

CD

VIDEO

TV CTRL

Preset code

2246

2248

2238

2247

0186

5066

1077

0186

Resetting the remote control settings

Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s settings to the factory default.

!

When preset codes are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.





2 Press and hold the ENTER button for three seconds.


En 77


Controlling components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 74 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select the component.

!

The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the

TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL button.

RECEIVER MULTI

OPERATION

SOURCE

RCU SETUP

BDR

DVR BD

SAT

TV

DVD

CD

USB iPod TUNER

INPUT SELECT

HMG

HDMI

ADPT

OPTION

VIDEO


INPUT

TV CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

CH VOL MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE


PTY

SEARCH RETURN iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

HDD DVD

TUNE

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR



1

HDMI OUT

222 3


4 5 6


7 8 9

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

ZONE 2

0

ZONE 3

CLASS

ENTER

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

CH

LIGHT

RECEIVER

TV and Audio/Video components

Button(s) TV

HDD (Red)

DVD (Green)

(Yellow)

(Blue) d e g m n o p

AUDIO u SOURCE

POWER ON/

OFF

Number buttons numerics

!

/CLR

ENTER (CLASS) k (dot)

CH ENTER

EXIT/INFO


KURO LINK

CH ENTER

EXIT i / j / k

ENTER

/ l

Blue

—

—

—

—

—

TV/DTV

—

AUDIO

TOOLS/

GUIDE/EPG

USER MENU i / j / k / l i / j / k / l

ENTER

HOME

MENU

ENTER

HOME MENU

RETURN RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue

—

AUTO SETUP

FREEZE

—

—

AV SELECTION

SCREEN SIZE

AUDIO

DISP DISPLAY

TV (Monitor) BD/DVD

POWER ON/

OFF numerics

CLEAR

ENTER

TOP MENU

HDD/

BDR/DVR

POWER ON/

OFF numerics

+

ENTER

TOP MENU

VCR

POWER ON/

OFF numerics

—

—

—

—

—

—

TOOLS

<a>

GUIDE — i / j / k / l i / j / k / l —

— ENTER

HOME

MENU

ENTER

HOME

MENU

—

RETURN RETURN —

HDD

DVD

VCR

—

—

—

MENU d e g

MENU d e g

— d e g m n o p

AUDIO m n o p

AUDIO m n

—

—

AUDIO

SAT/

CATV

POWER ON/

OFF numerics

*

ENTER

LIST

GUIDE

DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY — i / j / k / l

ENTER

HOME

MENU

RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISPLAY/

INFO

CH +/– CH +/– CH +/–

OUTPUT

RESOLU-

TION +/–

<a>

CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– a Controls for BD.

78 En


Audio/Video components


Number buttons

!

/CLR


ENTER d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISP a Controls for MD.

b Controls for SACD.

LD


+10

ENTER

TOP MENU

— i / j / k / l

ENTER

—

RETURN d e g m n o p

AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

DISC/ENTER

—

LEGATO LINK



—

—

SACD SETUP



— d e g m n o p

PURE AUDIO



TIME



CD/CD-R/

SACD


>10/CLEAR

— d e g m n o p

—

—

—

—

—

MD/DAT


CLEAR

<a>

OPEN/CLOSE

<a>

—

TAPE

POWER ON/OFF

—

CLEAR

—

ENTER

MS c

— d e g m n o p

—

MS d e / g / m / n

—

—

— m d n o e g p

AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

TV (Projector)


1

4

5

2

3

8

9

6

7

0

!

/CLR


ENTER

INFO i / j / k / l

ENTER

TEST

HIDE

MENU

HDMI1

HDMI2

COMP.

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

BRIGHT–

BRIGHT+

POWER OFF

ASPECT

CONTRAST+/–

TV (Projector)

POWER ON

MOVIE

STANDARD

DYNAMIC

USER1

USER2

USER3

COLOR+

SHARP+

GAMMA

COLOR–

SHARP–

COLOR TEMP

EXIT

En 79


The Advanced MCACC menu


Important

!




Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic

Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before.

Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.

This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data manually.






!

Press at any time to exit the

Home Menu .

3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the

Home Menu, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

!

Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto

MCACC) on page 34 for a quick and effective automatic surround setup.

!

Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC

(Expert) on page 80 for a more detailed

MCACC setup.

In addition, the Full Band Phase Control function calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the connected speakers.

!

Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings and customizes the Acoustic

Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 82).

!

Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur. When the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34, you can customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC presets, which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

Important

!

Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.

!

The screen saver will automatically appear after five minutes of inactivity.

CAUTION

!

The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the

Advanced MCACC menu, then press

ENTER.

If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from the

Advanced MCACC menu on page 80.

2 Select the parameters you want to set.

Use i / j to select the item, then use k / l to set.

!

Auto MCACC – The default is ALL

(recommended), but you can limit the system calibration to only one setting (to save time) if you want.

— When data measurement is taken (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System ), the reverb characteristics data (both before- and after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.

— When measurement is performed with other than SYMMETRY (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System ), the reverberation characteristics after calibration cannot be predicted, so the graph for the characteristics after calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed.

If you will need to display the graph for the characteristics after calibration

(“After”), take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the

—

Manual MCACC setup (page 82).

EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL or Keep SP System is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional on page 83 for more on this.

— Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective

MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 57.

!

EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is

EQ Pro & S-Wave ) – This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted.

After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately in the MCACC memory.

SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel.

FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels).

If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the

MCACC preset where you want to save the

SYMMETRY , ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.

80 En

The Advanced MCACC menu 12

!

THX Speaker (only available when the

Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or

Speaker Setting ) – Select YES when using

THX speakers (all speakers other than the front speakers are set to SMALL ). In other cases, leave at NO .

!

STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave ) – In addition to measurements at the listening position, you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating positions in your listening area. Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on-screen and note that the last microphone placement will be at your main listening position:

2nd reference

point

1

3

Main listening

position

3rd reference

point

2

3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC

SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.


MULTI-ZONE


DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

PHONES MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB


Microphone

Tripod

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.

!

It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.

4 When you’re finished setting the options, select START then press ENTER.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.

!

With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise!

or Check microphone.

), select RETRY after checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto

MCACC Setup on page 35) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.

!

Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.

7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.

If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘ OK ’ and press ENTER in step 8.

!

If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i / j to select the speaker and k / l to change the setting and continue.

!

If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase

(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.),


If is displayed, the speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.

— If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly. After this, perform the Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select

GO NEXT and continue.

8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press

ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings.

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.

!

If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.

9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.

The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the

Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page

87).

!

Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 87.

!

The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

!

If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the

MCACC Data Check screen (see Checking

MCACC Data on page 85).

Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen. When you’re finished, select

RETURN to go back to the Home Menu .

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC

Setup.

En 81


82

Manual MCACC setup

You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more familiar with the system.

Before making these settings, you should have already completed Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34.

You only need to make these settings once

(unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).

CAUTION

!

The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are output at high volume.

!

Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system

(see Fine Channel Level on page 82).

!

Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for your speaker system (see Fine

Speaker Distance on page 82).

!

Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room (see

Standing Wave on page 83).

The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic

Calibration EQ Adjust on page 83:

!

EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones (see Acoustic

Calibration EQ Adjust on page 83).

!

EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room’s reverb characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional on page 83).

!

Precision Distance (SC-LX85 only) – Fineadjusting the positions of the speakers (see

Precision Distance on page 84).

Important

!

Press the MCACC button while the pertinent setup screens are displayed to select MCACC presets.

!

For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position. Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu before you connect the microphone to this receiver.

!

See Problems when using the Auto MCACC

Setup on page 35 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference.

!

If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position.

1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the

Advanced MCACC menu.

See Making receiver settings from the Advanced

MCACC menu on page 80 if you’re not already at this screen.


If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.

Fine Channel Level

!

Default setting: 0.0dB

(all channels)

You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You can adjust the Channel

Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the

Manual speaker setup on page 87.

1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the

Manual MCACC setup menu.

The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.

2 Adjust the level of the left channel.

This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around 0.0dB

so that you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels.

!

After pressing ENTER , test tones will be output.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary.

Use k / l to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker.

When it sounds like both tones are the same volume, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

!

For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

!

If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use i / j to select it.


You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Fine Speaker Distance

!

Default setting: 3.00m

(all speakers)

For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time.

You can adjust the distance of each speaker in

1 cm increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 87.

1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the


2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.

Use k / l to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker.

Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening position, face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span.

!

If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.

!

The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from other channels. Adjust so that the sound of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly.

Note that when adjusting the subwoofer, depending on the low frequency response of your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the change even when the setting is increased or decreased or when the position of the speaker is changed. Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).

When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

!

For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

!

If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use i / j to select it.



En


Standing Wave

!

Default setting: ON / ATT 0.0dB

(all filters)

Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave

Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets.

!

Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the


2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing

Wave Control.

!

Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and subwoofer), Center or

SW (subwoofer).

!

TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is SW ) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate for the difference in output post-filter).

!

Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation

( ATT , the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).



Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust

!

Default setting: ON / 0.0dB

(all channels/ bands)

Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 80, you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits your tastes.

1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the


2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.

Use i / j to select the channel.

Use k / l to select the frequency and i / j to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of the screen and press k to return to Ch , then use i / j to select the channel.

!

The indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this happens, bring the level down until OVER!

disappears from the display.



Note

!

Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use k / l to select

TRIM , then use i / j to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.

Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional

This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers.

Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional procedure is effective when the lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as shown at Type A below, or when different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics as shown at Type B.

!

Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies

Level

0

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.

calibration range

80

Low frequencies

High frequencies

Conventional MCACC

EQ calibration range

160

Time

(in msec)

!

Type B: Reverb characteristics for different channels

Level

Front L

Front R

0

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.

calibration range

80

Conventional MCACC

EQ calibration range

160

Time

(in msec)

Using Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional

1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press

ENTER.

2 Select an option and press ENTER.

!

Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration.

!

Reverb View – You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel.

— If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning

(Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or

Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated.

By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the

Reverb Measurement function.

!

Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area.

Note that customizing system calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 80 and is not necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.

En 83


84

3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.

The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in Reverb View :

!

EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this receiver

(before calibration).

!

EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area.

— The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.

— After auto calibration with EQ Type

: SYMMETRY ( Full Auto MCACC , etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View . To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with

EQ ON .

When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 98 for troubleshooting information.

4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.

The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full Auto MCACC or

Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted.

Use k / l to select the channel, frequency and calibration setting you want to check. Use

En i / j to go back and forth between the three.

The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After . Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in

2 dB steps.

5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired time setting for calibration, and then select START.

!

To specify the place where the MCACC memory is to be stored, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.

Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration.

Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms setting.

Use k / l to select the setting. Use i / j to switch between them.

Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms , 10-30ms ,

20-40ms , 30-50ms , 40-60ms , 50-70ms and

60-80ms . This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration.

When you’re finished, select START . It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.

After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are given the option to check the settings on-screen.

Precision Distance

SC-LX85 only

Before using this function, perform the Full

Auto MCACC Setup procedure (see page 34).

Performing the Full Auto MCACC procedure corrects the distance to a precision of 1 cm, but the Precision Distance function lets you adjust the distance to the speakers (their position) with a precision of under 1 cm. Here, rather than correct the numerical value of the distance, actually move the physical positions of the speakers to fine-adjust (the subwoofer cannot be adjusted). The input from the microphone is indicated on the screen. Fine-adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum. The detailed distance adjustments that were previously performed by skilled installers by ear can easily be performed watching the gauge on the monitor. Place the microphone in the same position as when the microphone was connected and the Full Auto

MCACC operation was performed.

1 Select ‘Precision Distance’ from the


2 Fine-adjust the positions of the speakers in sequence, starting from the front right channel.

Test pulses are output from the speaker for the selected channel and from one other speaker.

Move the position of the selected speaker 1 cm towards or away from the microphone. Watch the screen when doing so, and fine-adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum. Also, the channel serving as the standard differs according to the channel being adjusted. Do not move the speaker serving as the standard channel.

The maximum gauge reading is 10.0. (If the reading stays under 10.0, adjust the speaker for the maximum value.)

!

If the microphone is placed in a different position from when the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC procedure was performed, it may not be possible to adjust properly. In this case, we recommend performing the procedure at Fine Speaker Distance on page

82 in the Manual MCACC measurements, then performing the adjustment described here without moving the microphone.

!

The adjustment here is for adjusting for an error of 1 cm or less (not adjustable with the Auto MCACC Setup). 0.0 may be displayed after distance correction with the

Auto MCACC Setup, but even in this case this adjustment allows you to optimize the correction. Note that if the Auto MCACC

Setup is performed after completing the fineadjustment here, the correction precision will drop to about 1 cm.

!

Like with the Auto MCACC Setup, perform this adjustment in as quiet an environment as possible. 0.0 will be displayed if abrupt noise is input during the adjustment.

!

The distance for all the channels can only be made uniform even if the R (front right) channel is adjusted in the proper order.

!

Be very careful not to tip the speakers over when moving them.

!

The result of the adjustment performed here can be checked by listening to the test pulses output at the Precision Distance (the test pulses will be more centrally positioned between the speakers than before the adjustment was performed). Be careful not to change the distance values at this time.




Checking MCACC Data

At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34, the procedure of Automatic MCACC

(Expert) on page 80 or after fine-adjusting at

Manual MCACC setup on page 82, you can check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen.




2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the

Home Menu.

3 Select the setting you want to check.

!

Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker

Setting on page 85 for more on this.

!

Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the different speakers. See Channel

Level on page 85 for more on this.

!

Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to the different speakers. See

Speaker Distance on page 85 for more on this.

!

Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave control filter settings. See

Standing Wave on page 85 for more on this.

!

Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check the calibration values of the listening environment’s frequency response. See

Acoustic Cal EQ on page 85 for more on this.

!

Group Delay – Used to check the speakers’ group delay (both before and after calibration). See Group Delay on page 85 for more on this.

4 Press RETURN to go back to the

MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps

2 and 3 to check other settings.


You will return to the Home Menu .

Speaker Setting

Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 88 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the

MCACC Data Check menu.

2 Select the channel you want to check.

Use i / j to select the channel. The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.

Channel Level

Use this to display the level of the various channels. See Channel Level on page 89 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the


2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k / l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘ --’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Speaker Distance

Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position. See

Speaker Distance on page 89 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the


2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k / l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘ --’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Standing Wave

Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing Wave on page 83 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the


2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use i / j to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control.

The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected

MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i / j to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

Acoustic Cal EQ

Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic

Calibration EQ Adjust on page 83 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the


2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i / j to select the channel.

The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected

MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i / j to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

Group Delay

Use this to display the calibrated speaker group delay results. See Better sound using Phase

Control and Full Band Phase Control on page 48 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Group Delay’ from the


2 When ‘Channel’ is highlighted, use k / l to select the channel you want to check.

The result of group delay calibration for the selected channel is displayed.

When measurements have been performed with Full Auto MCACC selected at Advanced MCACC or with ALL or

Full Band Phase Ctrl selected when

Auto MCACC is selected, the graph before group delay calibration is also displayed.

When After is selected at Calibration , the group delay after calibration is displayed.

Compared to when Before is selected, with

After there is less difference in the delay between frequency bands and the group delay between the different channels is uniform, allowing you to check the full band phase control effect.

No Data is displayed if the selected group delay has not been measured.

En 85


Data Management

This system allows you to store up to six

MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the same listening position). This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

From this menu you can copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don’t need.

!

This can be done in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page

80, either of which you should have already completed.




2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the

Home Menu.


!

Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for easy identification (see Renaming

MCACC presets on page 86).

!

MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one MCACC preset to another (see Copying

MCACC preset data on page 86).

!

MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets that you don’t want (see Clearing

MCACC presets on page 86).

Renaming MCACC presets

If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier identification.

1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the

Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.

Use i / j to select the preset, then k / l to select a preset name.

3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press RETURN when you’re finished.

You will return to the Data Management setup menu.

3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy them (‘To’).

Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.

When MCACC Memory Copy?

is displayed, select YES . If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.

Completed!

shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically return to the

Data Management setup menu.

Copying MCACC preset data

If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic

Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 82), we recommend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a reference point from which to start.

!

The settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page

80.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the


2 Select the setting you want to copy.

!

All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.

!

Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.

Clearing MCACC presets

If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the


2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.

Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.

When MCACC Memory Clear?

is displayed, select YES . If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.

Completed!

shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to the

Data Management setup menu.

86 En

The System Setup and Other Setup menus 13

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34, it isn’t necessary to make all of these settings.


Important

!




Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu

The following section describes how to change the speaker-related settings manually and make various other settings (input selection, OSD language selection, etc.).






!

Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the

Home Menu .


Home Menu, then press ENTER.


!

Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used for surround back terminals and the size, number distance and overall balance of the connected speakers (see

Manual speaker setup on page 87).

!

Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

!

OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language can be changed (see Changing the

OSD display language (OSD Language) on page 34).

!

Network Setup – Conducts the setup necessary to connect this unit to the network

(see Network Setup menu on page 89).

!

HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting

Control with HDMI (page 54).

!

Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver (see

The Other Setup menu on page 91).

Manual speaker setup

This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).

These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum

CAUTION

!

The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press

ENTER.

See Making receiver settings from the System

Setup menu on page 87 if you’re not already at this screen.


If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

!

Speaker System – Specifies how you are using your surround back speaker terminals and B speaker terminals (page 87).

!

Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of speakers you’ve connected (page

88).

!

Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your speaker system (page 89).

!

Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your speakers from the listening position

(page 89).

!

X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks (page

89).

!

THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are using a THX speaker setup (page 89).

3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Speaker system setting

!

Default setting: 9.1ch FH/FW

There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals with this receiver. In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the front height speakers or front wide speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room.

1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the

Manual SP Setup menu.

See Making receiver settings from the System

Setup menu on page 87 if you’re not already at this screen.

2 Select the speaker system setting.

!

9.1ch FH/FW – Select for normal home theater use with front height and front wide speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.

!

7.1ch + Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 61).

!

7.1ch Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-amping your front speakers (see

Bi-amping your speakers on page 18).

!

7.1ch + ZONE 2 – Select to use the front wide speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 61).

!

7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2 – Select to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 61).

!

5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2 – Select this to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone with the front speakers bi-amped (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 18).

!

5.1ch + ZONE 2+3 – Select to use the surround back (ZONE 2) and front wide

(ZONE 3) speaker terminals for an independent systems in another zone (see

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 61).

SC-LX85 only:

!

5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-amping your B speakers (see Biamping your speakers on page 18).

!

5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-amping your front and surround

En 87

13 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

88 speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 18).

!

5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-amping your front and center speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 18).

3 If you selected 9.1ch FH/FW,

7.1ch + Speaker B, 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp or 7.1ch + ZONE 2 in Step 2, select the placement of the surround speakers.

In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position, the surround sound of

5.1-channel sources is heard from the side.

This function mixes the sound of the surround speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it should be.

Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source, in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR .

!

ON SIDE – Select when the surround speakers is positioned right beside you.

!

IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker is positioned obliquely behind you.

4 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.

If No is selected, the setting is not changed.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Speaker Setting

Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently.

!

If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL .

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the


2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size.

Use k / l to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:

!

Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select

SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.

!

Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to the front speakers).

!

FH – Select LARGE if your front height speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height speakers, choose NO (the front height channel is sent to the front speakers).

— You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is

9.1ch FH/FW , 7.1ch + Speaker B or

7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2 .

— If the surround speakers are set to NO , this setting will automatically be set to

NO .

!

FW – Select LARGE if your front wide speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide speakers, choose NO (the front wide channel is sent to the front speakers).

— You can adjust this setting only when

Speaker System setting is 9.1ch FH/FW or 7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2 .

En

— If the surround speakers are set to NO , this setting will automatically be set to

NO .

!

Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).

!

SB – Select the number of surround back speakers you have (one, two or none). Select

LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose NO .

— You can adjust this setting only when

Speaker System setting is 9.1ch FH/FW ,

7.1ch + Speaker B , 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp or 7.1ch + ZONE 2 .

— If the surround speakers are set to

NO , the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO .

!

SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the

PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO

(the bass frequencies are output from other speakers).

— If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and

YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.

If you select NO for the subwoofer the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE .

Also, the center, surround, surround back, front height and front wide speakers can’t be set to

LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL .

In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.

3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.

Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).

!

This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE , or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL . It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.

!

With Full Auto MCACC setup or Auto MCACC setup ( ALL or

Speaker Setting ), the setting here will not apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set. Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human aural characteristics.

!

If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz .




Channel Level

Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor when setting up a home theater system.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the


The test tones will start.

2 Adjust the level of each channel using k / l .

Use i / j to switch speakers.

Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.

!

If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).



Note

!

You can change the channel levels by set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press CH LEVEL , and then using k / l on the remote control.



Note

!

For best surround sound, make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position.

X-Curve

Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The

X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks.

Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home

THX, Pure direct or Optimum surround modes.

1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the


2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.

Use k / l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct ). Use the following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:

Room size ( m 2 )

X-Curve

(dB/oct)

≤ 36 ≤ 48 ≤ 60 ≤ 72 ≤ 300 ≤ 1000

–0.5

–1.0

–1.5

–2.0

–2.5

–3.0

Speaker Distance

For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the


2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using k / l .

You can adjust the distance of each speaker in

0.01 m Increments.

!

If you select OFF , the frequency curve will be flat and the X-Curve has no effect.


THX Audio Setting

This menu allows the user to adjust various THX features including Loudness Plus, SBch processing, THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer (on/off), and Boundary Gain Control. Please see page

108 for details regarding these THX features.

!

ULTRA2 for the SC-LX85, SELECT2 for the

SC-LX75.

1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the


2 Select either ON or OFF for the THX

Loudness Plus setting.

3 Specify whether the SBch Processing is

AUTO or MANUAL.

!

AUTO – When surround back speakers are connected, Dolby Digital EX signal is present in the audio signals being input is detected and the appropriate THX surround mode is set.

!

MANUAL – The desired THX surround mode can be selected regardless of whether or not surround back channel signals are present in the audio signals being input.

4 Specify whether your subwoofer is

Ultra2/Select2 certified or not.

If your subwoofer isn’t THX Ultra2/Select2 certified, but you still want to switch boundary gain compensation on, select YES here, but the effect might not work properly.

5 Select either ON or OFF for Boundary

Gain Compensation setting.



Network Setup menu

Make the settings for connecting the receiver to the Internet and using the network functions.





Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Network Setup’ from the




!

IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/

Proxy of this receiver (page 89).

!

Network Standby – Allows the AVNavigator or iControlAV2 function to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode

(page 90).

!

Friendly Name – The name of the receiver displayed on a computer or other device connected to the network can be changed

(page 90).

!

Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network functions (page 90).

!

Port Number Setting – Sets the numbers of the ports where signals from IP Control are received (page 90).

!

Wireless LAN Converter – Used to make the wireless LAN converter’s access point and IP address settings (page 91).

IP address/Proxy setting

In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router (with a built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on the DHCP server function, and you will not need

En 89


90 to set up the network manually. You must set up the network as described below only when you have connected this receiver to a broadband router without a DHCP server function. Before you set up the network, consult with your ISP or the network manager for the required settings.

It is advised that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component.

!

In case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network settings of this receiver.

IP Address

The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations.

Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254

Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254

Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254

Subnet Mask

In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.

Default Gateway

In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.

Primary DNS Server /

Secondary DNS Server

In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the

‘ Primary DNS Server ’ field. In case there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter

‘ Secondary DNS Server ’ in the other DNS server address field.

Proxy Hostname / Proxy Port

This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server.

Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the

‘ Proxy Hostname ’ field. Also, enter the port number of your proxy server in the ‘ Proxy Port ’ field.

1 Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the

Network Setup menu.

2 Select the DHCP setting you want.

When you select ON , the network is automatically set up, and you do not need to follow Steps

3. Proceed with Step 4.

If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select ON , this receiver will use its own

Auto IP function to determine the IP address.

!

The IP address determined by the Auto IP function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Internet radio station if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function.

3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask,

Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and

Secondary DNS Server.

Press i / j to select a number and k / l to move the cursor.

4 Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the

Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server.

In case you select ‘ OFF ’, proceed with Step 7. In case you select ‘ ON ’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 5.

5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name.


6 Enter the port number of your proxy server.


7 Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/

Proxy setup.

Network Standby

This setting allows the AVNavigator or iControlAV2 function for operating the receiver from a computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

1 Select ‘Network Standby’ from the


2 Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF.

!

ON – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2 function can be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

!

OFF – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2 function cannot be used when the receiver is in the standby mode (This lets you reduce power consumption in the standby mode).

Friendly Name

1 Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the


2 Select ‘Edit Name’ then select

‘Rename’.

If after changing the name you want to restore the name to the default, select Default .

3 Input the name you want.


Parental Lock

Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also set the password accompanying the usage restrictions.

!

Upon shipment from the factory, the password is set to “0000”.

Important

When the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input is selected, the setting made here cannot be

En reflected. Set the input to something other than

HOME MEDIA GALLERY before making this setting.

1 Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the


2 Input the password.


3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock on or off.

!

OFF – Internet services are not restricted.

!

ON – Internet services are restricted.

4 If you want to change the password, select Change Password.

In this case, the procedure returns to step 2.

Port Number Setting

On this receiver, there can be up to 5 numbers of ports where signals are received. One of these, port 8102 which used for communicating with iControlAV2, cannot be changed, but the desired number can be set for the 4 other ports.

1 Select ‘Port Number Setting’ from the


2 Select the port number you want to change.

3 Input the port number.

!


!

It is not possible to set the same port number more than once.

4 If there are other port numbers you want to change, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Note

!

When the wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300) is connected, the port number cannot be set to port 3.


!

We recommend setting the port number to 23 or within the range of 49152 to 65535.

!

When the port number is changed, network communications between the receiver and

AVNavigator are no longer possible. In this case, click Settings on the AVNavigator’s function menu, select the IP Address tab and input one of the port numbers set on the receiver side to enable communications with

AVNavigator.

Wireless LAN Converter

This setting is required for connecting a wireless LAN converter to the receiver and using wireless network functions.

For the wireless LAN converter, use the

AS-WL300.

Access Point Setting

Make the connection settings for the wireless

LAN converter connected to the receiver and the access point. Connect the wireless LAN converter to the receiver and set DHCP on the

“ IP Address, Proxy ” settings menu beforehand

(page 89). There are four way to make the settings for connecting to the access point, as shown below.

!

WPS (PBC) – Connection settings are made automatically simply by pressing the WPS buttons on the access point and wireless LAN converter, following the instructions displayed on the receiver’s screen. This is the simplest way of making the settings, and is possible when the access point and wireless LAN converter are equipped with WPS buttons.

Network connection settings require approximately 2 minutes from the time the

WPS buttons are pressed. Wait until the settings are completed.

!

WPS (PIN) – Display a list of the SSIDs of connectable access points and select the access point to which you want to connect from this list. Connection settings are made by inputting the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the receiver’s screen to the access point to which you want to connect.

!

Search for Access Point – Display a list of the SSIDs of connectable access points and select the access point to which you want to connect from this list. Connection settings with the access point are made by setting the access point’s security protocol, security key and WEP default key (only when the access point’s security protocol is WEP).

!

Manual Setting – Connection settings are made by manually inputting the SSID, security protocol, security key and WEP default key of the access point to which you want to connect.

Note

!

When setting the wireless LAN converter, set

Network Standby to OFF , turn the receiver’s power off, then turn the power back on and set the wireless LAN converter. Check the network connections on the wireless LAN converter, then set Network Standby to ON as necessary.

!

If there is a “; ” (semicolon) in the access point’s SSID or security key, wireless LAN connection will not be possible even after the wireless LAN converter settings are completed. Change the setting of the access point’s SSID or security key to a character string that does not include a “; ” (semicolon).

!

If it is not possible to connect to the access point with the WPS (PBC) or WPS (PIN) connection settings, we recommend making the connection settings at

Search for Access Point or Manual Setting .

WLAN IP Address

If the IP address of a device connected in the

LAN other than the wireless LAN converter is set to “192.168.XXX.249”, the IP address of the wireless LAN converter will be redundant, making connection to the access point impossible. In this case, use this setting to set an IP address specific to the wireless LAN converter.

1 Select ‘Wireless LAN Converter’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Make the wireless LAN converter settings as necessary.

When making the connection settings of the wireless LAN converter and access point, select

“ Access Point Setting ” and make the connection settings for the wireless LAN converter and access point following the instructions on the screen.

If you want to set the wireless LAN converter’s

IP address, select “ WLAN IP Address ” and input the IP address.

Checking the Network

Information

The setting status of the following networkrelated items can be checked.

!

IP Address – Check the IP address of this receiver.

!

MAC Address – Check the MAC address of this receiver.

!

Friendly Name – Friendly Name on page 90.

!

SSID – Check the SSID of the access point connected with the wireless LAN converter

(only when a wireless LAN converter is connected).




2 Select ‘Network Information’ from the

Home Menu.

Display the setting status of the network-related items.

The Other Setup menu

The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.





Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.



!

Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn off automatically when the receiver is not being used.

!

Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related operations of this receiver (page 92).

!

Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this receiver’s remote control mode (page 92).

!

Flicker Reduction Setup – Adjusts the way the GUI screen looks (page 92).

!

Software Update – Use to update the receiver’s software and check the version.

!

SC-LX85 only:

RF Remote Setup – Allows the CU-RF100 to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode (page 92).

!

SC-LX75 only:

EXTENSION Setup – Allows the CU-RF100 to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode (page 92).

!

SC-LX85 only:

Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings for a multi-channel input (page 92).

En 91


!

Pairing Bluetooth Setup – Use to pair a

Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device (page 43).

5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Auto Power Down

The power can be set to turn off automatically if no operation has been performed for a specific amount of time with no audio or video signals being input to the receiver. When using ZONE

2 or ZONE 3, the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 power can also be set to turn off, but for ZONE 2 or ZONE

3 the power turns off automatically after the amount of time set here even if signals are being input or operations have been performed.

Different times can be set for the main zone,

ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.

1 Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the

Other Setup menu.

2 Select the zone you want to set and set the time after which the power turns off.

!

MAIN – The time can be selected from among “ 15 min ”, “ 30 min ”, “ 60 min ” and

“ OFF ”. The power turns off after there has been no signal and no operation for the selected time.

!

ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from among “ 30 min ”, “ 1 hour ”, “ 3 hours ”,

“ 6 hours ”, “ 9 hours ” and “ OFF ”. The power turns off after the selected time.

!

ZONE 3 – The time can be selected from among “ 30 min ”, “ 1 hour ”, “ 3 hours ”,

“ 6 hours ”, “ 9 hours ” and “ OFF ”. The power turns off after the selected time.

92

Note

!

Depending on the connected devices, the

Auto Power Down function may not work properly due to excessive noise or other reasons.

En

Volume Setup

You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is turned on.

1 Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the


2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want.

The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver’s power is turned on.

!

LAST (default) – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last turned off.

!

“ --” – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to minimum level.

!

–80.0dB

to +12.0dB

– Specify the volume to be set when the power is turned on, in steps of 0.5 dB.

It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup

(see below).

3 Select the Volume Limit setting you want.

Use this function to limit the maximum volume.

The volume cannot be increased above the level set here, even by operating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the front panel).

!

OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not limited.

!

–20.0dB

/ –10.0dB

/ 0.0dB

– The maximum volume is limited to the value set here.

4 Select the Mute Level setting you want.

This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed.

!

FULL (default) – No sound.

!

–40.0dB

/ –20.0dB

– The volume will be turned down to the level specified here.


You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Remote Control Mode Setup

!

Default setting: 1

This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver are being used.

1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.

3 Select ‘OK’ to change the remote control mode.

4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control’s setting.

See Operating multiple receivers on page 74.



Flicker Reduction Setup

!

Default setting: OFF

The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased.

If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting. Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.

1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.



RF Remote Setup

SC-LX85 only

!


The CU-RF100 can be used to operate the receiver by RF communications. To do so, set the RF Remote setting to ON . When ON is set here, the receiver can be operated even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

1 Select ‘RF Remote Setup’ from the


2 Select the RF Remote setting you want.



EXTENSION Setup

SC-LX75 only

!


A separately sold the CU-RF100 can be used to operate the receiver by RF communications. To do so, set the EXTENSION setting to ON . When

ON is set here, the receiver can be operated even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

1 Select ‘EXTENSION Setup’ from the


2 Select the EXTENSION setting you want.



Multi Channel Input Setup

SC-LX85 only

You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi-channel input. Also, when the multichannel input is selected as an input function, you can display the video images of other input functions. In the Multi Channel Input Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-channel input.

1 Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the


2 Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.

!

0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level originally recorded on the source.

!

+10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level increased by 10 dB.


3 Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.

When the multi-channel input is selected as an input function, you can display the video images of other input functions. The video input can be selected from the following: DVD ,

TV/SAT , DVR/BDR , VIDEO , OFF .



Software Update

Use this procedure to update the receiver’s software and check the version. There are two ways to update: via the Internet and via a USB memory device.

Updating via the Internet is performed by accessing the file server from the receiver and downloading the file. This procedure is only possible if the receiver is connected to the Internet.

Updating via a USB memory device is performed by downloading the update file from a computer, reading this file onto a USB memory device then inserting this USB memory device into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.

With this procedure, the USB memory device containing the update file must first be inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.

!

If an update file is provided on the Pioneer website, download it onto your computer.

When downloading an update file from the

Pioneer website onto your computer, the file will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before saving it on the USB memory device. If there are any old downloaded files or downloaded files for other models on the USB memory device, delete them.

Important

!

DO NOT unplug the power cord during updating.

!

When updating via the Internet, do not disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via a USB memory device, do not disconnect the

USB memory device.

1 Select ‘Software Update’ from the


2 Select the update procedure.

!

Update via Internet – The receiver checks whether updatable software is available via the Internet.

!

Update via USB Memory – The receiver checks whether the USB memory device inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel contains updatable software.

“ Accessing ” is displayed and the update file is checked. Wait a while.

3 Check on the screen whether or not an update file was found.

If “ New version found.

” is displayed, the update file has been found. The version number and updating time are displayed.

If “ This is the latest version. There is no need to update.

” is displayed, no update file has been found.

4 To update, select OK.

The updating screen appears and updating is performed.

!

The power turns off automatically once updating is completed.

Software Update messages

Status messages

Descriptions

NO UPDATE

FILE

FILE ERROR

No update file was found on the

USB memory device. Store the file in the USB memory device’s root directory.

Try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB device or storing the update file again. If the error still occurs, try using a different USB memory device.

UPDATE

ERROR 1 to UPDATE

ERROR 7

Turn the receiver’s power off, then turn it back on and try updating the software again.

Update via

USB

If this message flashes, updating has failed. Update via a USB memory device. Put the update file on a

USB memory device and connect the device to the USB port. When the file is found, software updating starts automatically.

UE11

UE22

UE33

Updating has failed. Use the same procedure to update the software again.

En 93


Additional information

Troubleshooting 1

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.

!

If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting below, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:

!

Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.

!

If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10 seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared.)

Power

Symptom

The power does not turn on.

SC-LX85 only: The power does not turn on.

Power cannot be turned off.

( ZONE 2 ON or ZONE 3 ON is displayed.)

The receiver suddenly switches off or the iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks.

Remedy

Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.

Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.

When remote control operation is set to RF two-way communications, the receiver’s power cannot be turned on unless RF Remote Setup is set to ON

(see RF Remote Setup on page 92).

When remote control operation is set to RF two-way communications, check whether the RF adapter is properly connected to the receiver.

SC-LX85 only:

Set the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2 or

ZONE 3 , then press u RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off.

SC-LX75 only:

Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 , then press u RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off.

Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.

The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Symptom

During loud playback the power suddenly switches off.

The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed.

AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the power automatically switches off. The

ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on.

AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the display and the FL OFF indicator flash and the power turns off.

The receiver suddenly power off or ADVANCED MCACC flashes.

FAN STOP is displayed, then iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks.

Display blinks 12V TRG ERR .

Remedy

Turn down the volume.

Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 82.

Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use

TUNE i / j to select D.SAFETY

c OFF d , and then use PRESET k / l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY

c OFF d to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.

Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.

Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.

The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on.

Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on

(see Installing the receiver on page 7).

Check whether the cables used to connect the speakers are short-circuited.

Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.

The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.

Lower the volume level.

The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a

Pioneer authorized independent service company.

The built-in cooling fan is malfunctioning. Do not try switching the receiver on.

Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on.

94 En

Additional information 14

No sound

Symptom

No sound is output when an input function is selected.

No sound is output from the front speakers.

No sound from the surround or center speakers.

No sound from surround back speakers.

No sound from front height or front wide speakers.

Remedy

Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE ) and speaker setting (press

SPEAKERS ).

Make sure the correct input function is selected.

Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.

Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL ).

Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format (see Setting the Audio options on page 57).

Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on page 14).

Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).

Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 45).

Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 89).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).

Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL , and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18). If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.

Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL , and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

The speaker terminal settings may be set so that no sound is output from the front height or front wide channel. Use the SPEAKERS button to select the proper setting (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 61).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).

Symptom

No sound from subwoofer.

No sound from one speaker.

Sound is produced from analog components, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD,

CD, etc.).

No sound is produced even if

MULTI CH IN is selected.

No sound is output or a noise is output when Dolby Digital/

DTS software is played back.

No sound when using the

Home Menu .

Remedy

Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.

If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.

Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES , or Front: LARGE /

Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF , or to a very quiet setting (see

Setting the Audio options on page 57).

Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 89).

Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).

Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 89).

Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see

Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 45).

Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 47).

Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

Check the digital output settings on the source component.

If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

SC-LX85 only:

When 5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp or 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp is selected in the

Speaker System settings (when the center or surround speakers are biamped), no sound is produced even when MULTI CH IN is selected.

Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.

Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output settings of your BD or DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.

If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the

Home Menu .

En 95


Other audio problems

Symptom

Speaker switching sound (clicking sound) is heard from receiver during playback.

Broadcast stations cannot be selected automatically, or there is considerable noise in radio broadcasts.

Noise is output when scanning a DTS

CD.

When playing a DTS format LD there is audible noise on the soundtrack.

Can’t record audio.

Subwoofer output is very low.

Everything seems to be set up correctly, but the playback sound is odd.

The Phase Control feature doesn’t seem to have an audible effect.

Full Band Phase Control cannot be selected.

Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input.

Remedy

Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide) and surround back speakers may switch automatically in function of changes in the input audio. A speaker switching sound (clicking sound) will be heard from the receiver at this time. If this sound bothers you, we recommend to change the speaker terminal option (see

Switching the speaker terminals on page 61).

Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.

Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 29).

Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.

Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.

This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.

Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 47).

You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an analog source.

For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.

To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).

If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).

Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see

Speaker Distance on page 89).

Perform Full Auto MCACC measurements (see Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34). Full

Band Phase Control automatically turns on once measurements are completed.

Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not causing interference.

Symptom

Can’t select some Input functions by the INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control.

There seems to be a time lag between the speakers and the output of the subwoofer.

The maximum volume available

(shown in the front panel display) is lower than the +12dB maximum.

Certain listening modes or

HOME MENU items cannot be selected.

Remedy

Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see The Input

Setup menu on page 36).

Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try

OFF (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto

MCACC) on page 34 to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).

Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on page

92).

When Operation Mode is set to Basic , the Pioneer-recommended settings are made and not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions without restrictions, set Operation Mode to Expert

(see Operation Mode Setup on page 36).

ADAPTER PORT terminal

Symptom

The Bluetooth wireless technology device cannot be connected or operated. Sound from the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not emitted or the sound is interrupted.

Remedy

Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band

(microwave oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology apparatus) is near the unit. If such an object is near the unit, set the unit far from it.

Or, stop using the object emitting the electromagnetic waves.

Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that obstructions are not set between the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit. Set the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance between them is less than about 10 m and no obstructions exist between them.

Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are correctly connected.

The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communication mode supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology. Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the Bluetooth wireless technology device. Reset the pairing.

Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device that supports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.

96 En


Video

Symptom

No image is output when an input is selected.

Can’t record video.

Noisy, intermittent, or distorted picture.

Video signals are not output from the component terminal.

The picture's movement is unnatural.

Remedy

Check the video connections of the source component.

For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another component are connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 59), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.

Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

Check the video output settings of the source component.

Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.

Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the

Video options on page 59) and/or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the

Video options on page 59) to OFF .

Check that the source is not copy-protected.

The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.

Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then start playback again.

When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output to the monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do the following:

— Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.

— Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting (see Setting the Video options on page 59).

— Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component terminals. Input the video signals from the player or other source to the composite or component terminals. When using the component terminal, assign it at Input Setup (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

When Resolution under VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080/24p, the picture may not be displayed properly for some source materials. In this case, set the resolution to something other than 1080/24p (page 59).

Settings

Symptom

The Auto MCACC Setup continually shows an error.

After using the Auto MCACC

Setup, the speaker size setting is incorrect.

Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker

Distance setting properly.

Remedy

The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 35). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 87).

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND

BACK L (Single) terminals.

To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.


If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:

— The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.

— Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions,


If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.

— If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.

There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an airconditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use

Auto MCACC Setup again.

Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers, room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases.

Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 88, and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic

MCACC (Expert) on page 80 if this is a recurring problem.

Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).

En 97


Symptom

SC-LX85 only: Gauge (value) does not increase with the

Precision Distance adjustment.

Remedy

Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).

Perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure before the Precision Distance adjustment (see Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto

MCACC) on page 34).

Place the microphone accurately in the same position as when the

Full Auto MCACC procedure was performed.

Do not move the speaker used as the reference point. Also, adjust in order, starting from the front right speaker.

When adjusting the speaker positions, do not move the speakers much; only move them about 1 cm towards or away from the microphone.

If you forget exactly where the microphone should be positioned or if there are problems after the procedure has been performed repeatedly, re-calibrate the distance using the Full Auto MCACC procedure, then without moving the microphone redo the Precision Distance adjustment.

With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 10 seconds while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.

The display shows KEY LOCK

ON when you try to make settings.

Most recent settings have been erased.

The various system settings are not stored.

Certain listening modes or

HOME MENU selected.

items cannot be

The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.

Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones before unplugging the power cord.

Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The settings will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn off. Turn off all zones before pulling out the power cord.)

When Operation Mode is set to Basic , the Pioneer-recommended settings are made and not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions without restrictions, set Operation Mode to Expert (see Operation Mode

Setup on page 36).

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output

Symptom

The reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration does not appear entirely flat.

EQ adjustments made using the Manual MCACC setup do not appear to change the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration.

Lower frequency response curves do not seem to have been calibrated for SMALL speakers.

Remedy

There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting

ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.

Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.

The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.

Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration. However, these adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.

Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.

Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is output for display.

Display

Symptom

The display is dark or off.

You can’t get DIGITAL to display when using SIGNAL SEL .

2 DIGITAL or DTS does not light when playing Dolby/DTS software.

When playing Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the receiver’s format indicators do not light.

When playing certain discs, none of the receiver’s format indicators light.

Remedy

Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.

Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

These indicators do not light if playback is paused.

Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.

Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.

Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 47).

Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.

Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or

DTS is selected.

The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.

98 En


Symptom

When playing a disc with the listening mode set to Auto Surround or ALC, 2 Pro Logic II or DTS Neo:X appear on the receiver.

During playback of DVD-

Audio, the display shows PCM .

The power turns off automatically and some indicator flashes, or some indicator flashes and the power does not turn on.

Remedy

Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 47).

If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.

This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection.

This is not a malfunction.

See the Power section (page 94).

Remote control

Symptom

Cannot be remote controlled.

Other components can’t be operated with the system remote.

Remedy

Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it matches the setting on the main unit (see Operating multiple receivers on page 64 (SC-LX85)/ page 74 (SC-LX75)).

Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote

Control Mode Setup on page 92).

Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 7).

Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 7).

Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.

Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.

Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 32).

If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.

The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.

When commands from the remote control units of other devices are registered using the learning function, in some cases they may not be learned properly. In this case, register the commands again using the learning function (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 65 (SC-

LX85) / page 75 (SC-LX75)). If they still do not work, they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on this receiver’s remote control. Operate the device using another remote control.

Symptom

SC-LX85 only: Receiver or other components cannot be operated by RF two-way communications.

Remedy

There may be radio interference with other devices. Try increasing the distance from microwave ovens, devices on a wireless LAN, other wireless devices, etc. (see Precautions when using the Omni-Directional RF Remote

Control on page 72).

There may be radio interference with other devices. Move the RF adapter and wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300) apart. If there is no improvement, change the remote control to the IR MODE (see Operating this receiver by RF communications on page 71).

Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 7).

If the RF adapter’s LED is off, the RF adapter may not be properly connected to the receiver. Check whether the RF adapter is properly connected to the receiver (see Connecting the RF adapter on page 15).

The devices may no longer be properly paired. Pair them again (see Pairing the


When the remote control or main unit are reset, the RF communications function is also reset. Make the settings again (see Using the RF communications function on page 70).

Flickering may occur when the remaining battery power is low. Replace the batteries with new ones (see Loading the batteries on page 7).

SC-LX85 only: The remote control display flickers.

HDMI

Symptom

The HDMI indicator blinks continuously.

No picture or sound.

Remedy

Check all the points below.

No picture.

This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component or composite video jacks.

Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver.

If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep

Color or other setting for your component.

While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.

To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI ®

Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature.

Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 59).

En 99


Symptom

No sound, or sound suddenly ceases.

Noisy or distorted picture.

HDCP ERROR shows in the display.

When Control with HDMI is set to ON , the TV/SAT input’s

HDMI Input assignment is canceled.

Synchronized operation not possible using Control with

HDMI function.

Remedy

Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP ( Setting the Audio options on page 57).

If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.

If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.

Check the audio output settings of the source component.

HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.

Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.

Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then start playback again.

If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.

Even when Control with HDMI is set to ON , the HDMI input is assigned for the BD , DVD , DVR/BDR and VIDEO inputs regardless of the Control with

HDMI setting, so use these terminals.

Check the HDMI connections.

The cable may be damaged.

Select ON for the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page 54).

Select ALL for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page

54).

Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.

Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating instructions).

Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to

HDMI OUT 1 . Then turn on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.

Troubleshooting 2

AVNavigator

Symptom

AVNavigator does not interact well with the receiver.

Causes

The receiver’s power is not turned on.

The receiver or computer is not connected to the LAN.

The router’s power is off.

AVNavigator’s network settings are not correct.

The receiver’s port number setting has been changed.

Network connections could be restricted due to the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

When the operating instructions interactive mode is changed, the settings may not be transferred to the browser, causing

AVNavigator to stop interacting.

Remedy

Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about 60 seconds after the power turns on for network functions to start.)

After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver.

Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or computer

(page 30).


Turn the router’s power on.

After the router is fully started up, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver.

If your router does not support DHCP, the receiver’s

IP address must be set in AVNavigator. First set the IP address on the receiver, then set the same address in AVNavigator (page 89).


Click Settings on the AVNavigator’s function menu, select the IP Address tab and input the changed port number (one of the port numbers set on the receiver) (page 90).


Check the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.


Either refresh the page’s display using the browser’s refresh button or display a different page from the links so that the setting is transferred.

100 En


Symptom

When the Wiring Navi ,

Interactive Manual ,

Glossary or

Software Update is launched, a warning about security protection appears on the browser.

AVNavigator cannot be installed.

Software updating does not operate well.

Causes

This is because of the browser’s security function.

Remedy

This is not a problem. Perform the operation to authorize the blocked contents.

An error message may appear if there are not enough system resources available.

Installation of AVNavigator may fail because of incompatibilities with other applications.

There may be a problem with your Internet Service Provider’s network.

Re-start the PC, then start the installer (AVNV_XXX_ xxx.exe) with no other applications active.

Try the following, in the order indicated.

1. If there are any other applications active, exit the other applications and try starting the installer

(AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) again.

2. If that does not work, try restarting your PC, and starting the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) with no other applications active.

Contact your contracted provider.

USB interface

Symptoms

The folders/files stored on a USB memory device are not displayed.

Causes

The folders/files are currently stored in a region other than the FAT (File Allocation Table) region.

Remedies

Store the folders/files in the FAT region.

The number of levels in a folder is more than 8.

There are more than 30 000 folders/files stored in a USB memory device.

Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to

8 (page 39).

Limit the maximum number of folders/files stored in a USB memory device to 30 000 (page 39).

The audio files are copyrighted.

Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory device cannot be played back (page 39).

Symptoms

A USB memory device is not recognized.

Causes

The USB memory device does not support the mass storage class specifications.

Remedies

Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications. Note that there are cases where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications are not played back on this receiver (page 39).

Connect the USB memory device and switch on this receiver (page 31).

This receiver does not support USB hubs (page 39).

A USB memory device is connected and displayed, but the audio files stored on the USB memory device cannot be played back.

Cannot detect USB keyboard.

Cannot enter correct text using the USB keyboard.

A USB hub is currently being used.

This receiver recognizes the

USB memory device as a fraud.

Some formats of USB memory devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS, cannot be played back on this receiver.

The file format cannot be properly played back on this receiver.

The USB keyboard is routed through a USB hub.

A PS2 keyboard is routed through a PS2/USB connector.

Keyboard is not a USB HID

Class device.

Keyboard is not US-international layout keyboard.

Switch off and on again this receiver.

Check whether the format of your USB memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the FAT

12, NTFS, and HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver (page 39).

See the list of file formats that can be played back on this receiver (page 41).

This receiver is not compatible with USB hubs. Plug the keyboard directly into the receiver.

PS2 keyboards cannot be used with this receiver, even if routed through a PS2/USB connector. Use a

USB keyboard.

Some devices will not be detected. Use a USB HID

Class keyboard.

Use a US-international layout keyboard. NB: Some characters cannot be entered.

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

Symptoms

Cannot access the network.

Causes

The LAN cable is not firmly connected.

The router is not switched on.

Internet security software is currently installed in the connected component.

The audio component on the network which has been switched off is switched on.

Remedies

Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 30).

Switch on the router.

There are cases where a component with Internet security software installed cannot be accessed.

Switch on the audio component on the network before switching on this receiver.

En 101


Symptoms

Playback does not start while “ Connecting...

” continues to be displayed.

The PC or Internet radio is not properly operated.

The audio files stored on components on the network, such as a PC, cannot be played back.

Cannot access the component connected to the network.

Causes

The component is currently disconnected from this receiver or the power supply.

Remedies

Check whether the component is properly connected to this receiver or the power supply.

The corresponding IP address is not properly set.

The IP address is being automatically configured.

Windows Media Player 11 or

Windows Media Player 12 is not currently installed on your PC.

Audio files were recorded in formats other than MP3, WAV

(LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC,

FLAC, and WMA.

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4

AAC or FLAC are being played back on Windows Media Player

11 or Windows Media Player 12.

The component connected to the network is not properly operated.

The component connected to the network does not permit file sharing.

The folder stored on the component connected to the network has been deleted or damaged.

Network connections could be restricted due to the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

The component connected to the network is not properly set.

Switch on the built-in DHCP server function of your router, or set up the network manually according to your network environment (page 89).

The automatic configuration process takes time.

Please wait.

Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media

Player 12 on your PC (page 49).

Play back audio files recorded in MP3, WAV (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or WMA. Note that some audio files recorded in these formats may not be played back on this receiver.

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC cannot be played back on Windows Media Player 11 or

Windows Media Player 12. Try using another server.

Refer to the operation manual supplied with your server.

Check whether the component is affected by special circumstances or is in the sleep mode.

Try rebooting the component if necessary.

Try changing the settings for the component connected to the network.

Check the folder stored on the component connected to the network.

Check the computer’s network settings, security settings, etc.

There are no playable audio files on the component connected to the network.

If the client is automatically authorized, you need to enter the corresponding information again. Check whether the connection status is set to “Do not authorize”.

Check the audio files stored on the component connected to the network.

Symptoms

Audio playback is undesirably stopped or disturbed.

Causes

The audio file currently being played back was not recorded in a format playable on this receiver.

Remedies

Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format supported by this receiver.

Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted.

Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or displayed (page 53).

Connect the LAN cable properly (page 30).

The LAN cable is currently disconnected.

There is heavy traffic on the network with the Internet being accessed on the same network.

When in the DMR mode, depending on the external controller being used, playback may be interrupted when a volume operation is performed from the controller.

There is a connection routed through a wireless LAN on the same network.

Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on the network.

In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.

Cannot access

Windows Media Player

11 or Windows Media

Player 12.

In case of Windows Media Player

11: You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with Windows XP or

Windows Vista installed.

In case of Windows Media Player

12: You are currently logged onto the domain through your

PC with Windows 7 installed.

There may be a shortage of bandwidth on the 2.4

GHz band used by the wireless LAN. Make wired

LAN connections not routed through a wireless

LAN.

Install away from any devices emitting electromagnetic waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave ovens, game consoles, etc.). If this does not solve the problem, stop using other devices that emit electromagnetic waves.

Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine (page 50).

102 En


Symptoms

Cannot listen to Internet radio stations.

Causes

The firewall settings for components on the network are currently in operation.

You are currently disconnected from the Internet.

Remedies

Check the firewall settings for components on the network.

The Home Media Gallery cannot be operated with the buttons on the remote control.

The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are stopped or interrupted.

The remote control is not currently set to the Home Media

Gallery mode.

Check the connection settings for components on the network, and consult with your network service provider if necessary (page 89).

There are cases where you cannot listen to some

Internet radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Internet radio stations on this receiver

(page 50).

Press HMG to set the remote control to the Home

Media Gallery mode (page 50).

Troubleshooting of wireless

LAN

Network cannot be accessed via wireless

LAN.

Wireless LAN converter’s power is not on.

(Wireless LAN converter’s “Power”, “WPS” and “Wireless” indicators are not all lit.)

!

Check that the USB cable connecting the wireless LAN converter to the receiver’s DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS

LAN terminal is properly connected.

WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiver’s display window.

!

There is a problem with the wireless

LAN converter’s power supply. Turn the receiver’s power off, then disconnect the USB cable, reconnect the USB cable and turn the receiver’s power back on.

!

If is still displayed after repeating the above procedure several times, there is a problem with the receiver or the USB cable. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a

Pioneer authorized independent service company.

The LAN cable is not firmly connected.

!

Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 31).

Wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.) are too far apart or there is an obstacle between them.

!

Improve the wireless LAN environment by moving the wireless LAN converter and base unit closer together, etc.

There is a microwave oven or other device generating electromagnetic waves near the wireless LAN environment.

!

Use the system in a place away from microwave ovens or others device generating electromagnetic waves.

!

Avoid using devices generating electromagnetic waves as much as possible when using the system with the wireless

LAN.

Multiple wireless LAN converters are connected to the wireless LAN router.

!

When connecting multiple wireless LAN converters, their IP addresses must be changed. For example, if the wireless

LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the first wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249”, the second wireless LAN converter’s IP address to

“192.168.1.248”, using values between 2 and 249 (such as “249” and “248”) that are not assigned to other wireless LAN converters or to other devices.

Wireless LAN connections cannot be established between the wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.).

!

With the wireless LAN converter connected to the receiver, turn the receiver’s power off, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, then plug the power cord back in and turn the receiver’s power on.

!

Sets to OFF and turn the receiver’s power off then back on.

!

The wireless LAN converter must be set in order to establish wireless LAN connections. See Wireless LAN Converter on page 91.

The wireless LAN converter is properly connected to the receiver and the wireless

LAN converter’s indicators are lit, but the wireless LAN converter cannot be set from the receiver (the settings screen cannot be displayed).

!

If DHCP in the receiver’s IP settings is set to OFF and the IP address has been set manually, the IP address set in the wireless LAN converter may not match.

En 103


In the receiver’s IP settings, set DHCP to ON. After the setting is completed, turn the receiver’s power off. Next, turn the receiver’s power back on and check whether the wireless LAN converter’s settings can be displayed with the receiver.

If the settings can be displayed, change the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter as necessary.

The IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter do not match the settings of the wireless LAN router, etc.

!

Check the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter

(including the DHCP setting).

If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”, turn the receiver’s power off, then turn the power back on.

Check that the IP addresses of the receiver and wireless LAN converter match the settings of the wireless LAN router, etc.

If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”, set an IP address matching the network of the base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.).

For example, if the wireless LAN router’s

IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the receiver’s IP address to “192.168.1.XXX”

(*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”, the gateway and DNS to “192.168.1.1”.

Next, set the wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249” (*2).

(*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to a number between 2 and 248 that is not assigned to other devices.

(*2) Set the “249” in “192.168.1.249” to a number between 2 and 249 that is not assigned to other devices.

104 En

Try making the wireless LAN converter’s advanced settings.

!

The wireless LAN converter can be connected to a computer to make the advanced wireless LAN settings. For details, see the CD-ROM included for the wireless LAN converter. Check the settings of the wireless LAN router, etc., then change the settings of the wireless

LAN converter.

Note, however, that making the advanced wireless LAN settings will not necessarily improve the wireless LAN environment. Be careful when changing the settings.

The access point is set to conceal the SSID.

!

In this case, the SSID may not be displayed on the access point list screen.

If not, set the SSID, etc., by making the wireless LAN converter settings on the receiver manually.

The access point’s security settings use

WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.

!

The receiver does not support WEP

152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.

Network connections cannot be established even when the above measures are taken.

!

Reset the wireless LAN converter. After this, redo the wireless LAN converter’s settings.

About resetting

1. Check that the wireless LAN converter’s power is on.

2. Press the wireless LAN converter’s reset button for at least 3 seconds.

3. Release the reset button.

When the wireless LAN converter is restarted, the resetting procedure is completed.

About status messages

Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the

Home Media Gallery.

Status messages

STARTING H.M.G.

Connection Down

File Format Error

Track Not Found

Server Error

Server Disconnected empty

Preset Not Stored

Out of Range

License Error

Item Already Exists

Favorite List Full

Descriptions

A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected.

Wait for a while.

The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed.

Cannot be played back for some reasons.

The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network.

The selected server cannot be accessed.

The server has been disconnected.

There are no files stored in the selected folder.

The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved.

The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings.

The license for the contents to be played back is invalid.

This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has already been registered.

This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the Favorites folder is already full.


Speaker Setting Guide

In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is important to accurately position the speakers and make their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the multi-channel sound.

The three major elements in positioning the speakers are distance , angle and orientation (the direction in which the speakers are pointing).

Distance : The distance of all the speakers should be equal.

Angle : The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.

Orientation : The orientation should be horizontally symmetrical.

In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is possible to automatically correct the speaker distance electrically to a precision of 1 cm using the Full Auto MCACC Setup function (page 34).

For the volume and sound quality as well, accurate sound field correction using the equalizer and speaker phase characteristic correction using the Full Band Phase Control function

(page 48) together make it possible to achieve the ideal listening environment.

Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment

Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers are steady, and leave at least 10 cm from the surrounding walls. Position the speakers attentively so that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the listening position (center of the adjustments). (We recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant from the listening position.

Note

!

If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a circle), use the Auto MCACC

Setup speaker distance correction and Fine

Speaker Distance (or Precision Distance – SC-

LX85 only) functions to make them equalize the distance artificially.

Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height

Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.

Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid- and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.

If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it to the listening position.

Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height of the ears.

We suggest you use this example of installation as reference when trying out different installation methods.

Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer

Placing the subwoofer between the center and front speakers makes even music sources sound more natural (if there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not cancel out the bass sound output from the other speakers. Also note that placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could excessively amplify the bass sound.

If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but depending on the shape of the room this could result in standing waves.

However, even if standing waves are generated, their influence on the sound quality can be prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave control function (page 83).

Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation

If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced properly.

However, if all the speakers are pointed towards the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped. Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel

Research Group has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area 30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position (between the surround speakers and the listening position).

However, the sense of sound positioning can differ according to the conditions in the room and the speakers being used. In smaller environments in particular (when the front speakers are close to the listening position), with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward.

Step 5: Default settings with the

Auto MCACC Setup (auto sound field correction) function

It is more effective to perform the Full Auto

MCACC Setup (page 34) and Precision

Distance (SC-LX85 only) (page 84) procedure once the adjustments described above have been completed.

Note

!

The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger than the distance actually measured with a tape measure, etc. This is because this distance is corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.

Positional relationship between speakers and monitor

Position of front speakers and monitor

The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible to the monitor.

L

45° to 60°

R

Position of center speaker and monitor

Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker, keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point it towards the listening position.

Installation on floor (Diagram as seen

from the side)

Monitor

En 105


106

!

If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install it away from the TV.

!

When installing the center speaker on top of the monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards the listening position.

to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections. Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration.

Important information regarding the HDMI connection

There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-equipped component you are connecting-check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).

If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the following configurations when connecting up.

Configuration A

Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s component video input.

The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal for transmission to the display. For this configuration, use the most convenient connection

(digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections.

Note

!

The picture quality will change slightly during conversion.

Note

!

If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component.

!

Depending on the component, audio output may be limited to the number of channels available from the connected display unit (for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio limitations).

!

If you want to switch the input function, you’ll have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display unit.

!

Since the sound is muted on the display when using the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on the display every time you switch input functions.

Cleaning the unit

!

Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt.

!

When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleansers.

!

Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will corrode the surface.

Configuration B

Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable.

Then use the most convenient connection

(digital is recommended) for sending audio

Precautions when using the Wireless LAN converter

(AS-WL300)

Precautions regarding wavelength

!

This wireless LAN converter is designed to prevent other persons from eavesdropping on the transmitted signals, but precautions should nonetheless be taken against the chance that other persons’ could intercept and listen to the signals transmitted. Given that this wireless LAN converter produces radio wave transmissions, another person could deliberately use a receiver to attempt to intercept such transmissions. As a result, this device should not be used to play important transmissions demanding privacy.

This wireless LAN converter utilizes the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This band is also used by a variety of other devices as noted below. In particular, devices not often cognizant to the user are listed in item 2.

1 Examples of common devices utilizing the 2.4 GHz band:

!

Cordless phone

!

Cordless facsimile

!

Microwave oven

!

Wireless LAN devices (IEEE802.11b/g)

!

Wireless AV device

!

Wireless controllers for games

!

Microwave therapeutic devices

!

Bluetooth wireless technology devices

2 Other devices using 2.4 GHz:

!

Shoplifting-prevention systems

!

Amateur wireless radio

!

Distribution control systems at factories and warehouses

!

Railway and emergency vehicle wireless identification systems

En

When such devices are used simultaneously with this wireless LAN converter, signal interference may occur, resulting in signal dropouts.

To improve reception quality, try the following:

!

Turn off the other device emitting radio waves.

!

Place the interfering device farther away

(Move both the wireless LAN converter and

RF adapter away from the interfering device).

Do not use this wireless LAN converter in the following locations, since transmission interruption may result:

!

Locations where another device using the same 2.4 GHz frequency is being used, such as a Bluetooth wireless technology device or wireless LAN, or in the vicinity where the magnetic field, static electricity, or radio wave interference from another device may occur (depending on the environment, radio waves may not transmit effectively).

!

Move the radio farther away.

!

If visual noise appears on the television screen, it is possible that this wireless LAN converter is producing adverse influence on the antenna input of the television, video device, BS tuner, or CS tuner. Move this wireless LAN converter farther away from the antenna input of the affected device.

Usable range

!

Designed for use only within private homes

(signal transmission distance may be reduced due to room design or conditions).

In the following cases, this wireless LAN converter cannot operate due to poor or erratic radio wave transmission.

!

When signal transmission is blocked by a wall or floor constructed of ferro-concrete or metal.

!

Nearby large metal furniture objects.

!

In large crowds of people, or near obstructive buildings.

!

Locations where another device using the same 2.4 GHz frequency is being used, such

Additional information 14 as a Bluetooth wireless technology device or wireless LAN, or in the vicinity where the magnetic field, static electricity, or radio wave interference from another device may occur.

!

When living in a housing complex (apartment, condominium, etc.) where the next-door unit has a microwave oven located near to this wireless LAN converter. Note that even a microwave oven will not interfere with this wireless LAN converter when not in use.

!

When using multiple Omni-Directional RF

Remote Control in the same location.

!

Persons using pacemakers or other medical or therapeutic electronic devices should consult the manufacturer or dealer of their device regarding the potential effects of radio waves from this wireless LAN converter.

!

Do not use in aircraft, hospitals, or other locations where the use of radio-wavegenerating devices is prohibited, since adverse affects may be caused to flight communications equipment or medical devices. Follow all precautions and directives given by medical institutions.

Signal reflection

!

The signals reaching the wireless LAN converter include those transmitted in a straight line from the main unit (direct waves), and those that are received after being bounced off of walls, furniture, and other buildings (reflected waves).

As a result, reflected waves can be generated by obstacles and other reflective objects, causing variations in the signal quality. In such cases, try slightly changing the position of the wireless LAN converter.

CAUTION

!

With the exception of cases determined by law to be the subject of legal liability, Pioneer refuses all responsibility for any harm resulting to the customer or other person as a result of the use of this wireless LAN converter.

For safe use

!

Do not use near electronic devices utilizing high-precision or very delicate radio waves, since the other device may operate incorrectly, resulting in malfunction.

Examples of devices requiring particular caution:

!

Hearing aids, pacemakers and other medical or therapeutic electronic devices, fire/smoke detectors, automatic door openers, other automatic devices.

Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R&TTE Directive

1999/5/EC

Manufacturer:

PIONEER CORPORATION

1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku,

Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa

212-0031, Japan

EU Representative’s:

Pioneer Europe NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1,

9120 Melsele, Belgium http://www.pioneer.eu

English:

Hereby, Pioneer, declares that this

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive

1999/5/EC.

Suomi:

Pioneer vakuuttaa täten että

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Nederlands:

Hierbij verklaart Pioneer dat het toestel

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG

Français:

Par la présente Pioneer déclare que l’appareil SC-LX85/SC-LX75 est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE

Svenska:

Härmed intygar Pioneer att denna

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 står I

överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv

1999/5/EG.

Indoor Use Only

Utiliser à l’intérieur seulement

Dansk:

Undertegnede Pioneer erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr SC-LX85/SC-LX75 overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF

Deutsch:

Hiermit erklärt Pioneer, dass sich dieses SC-LX85/SC-LX75 in

Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der

Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi)

SC-LX85/SC-LX75

Italiano:

Con la presente Pioneer dichiara che questo SC-LX85/SC-LX75 è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Español:

Por medio de la presente Pioneer declara que el SC-LX85/SC-LX75 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva

1999/5/CE

En 107


Português:

Pioneer declara que este

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Pioneer tímto prohlašuje, že tento

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice

1999/5/ES

Eesti:

Käesolevaga kinnitab Pioneer seadme

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 vastavust direktiivi

1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

Magyar:

Alulírott, Pioneer nyilatkozom, hogy a

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek

és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Ar šo Pioneer deklarē, ka

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 atbilst Direktīvas

1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.

Šiuo Pioneer deklaruoja, kad šis

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB

Direktyvos nuostatas.

Malti:

Hawnhekk, Pioneer jiddikjara li dan

SC-LX85/SC-LX75

108 En

Pioneer týmto vyhlasuje, že

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.

Pioneer izjavlja, da je ta

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.

Prin prezenta, Pioneer declara ca acest

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 este in conformitate cu cerintele esentiale si alte prevederi ale Directivei 1999/5/EU.

Surround sound formats

Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below.

See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent

Nos: 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535,

6,226,616, 7,212,872, 7,003,467, 7,272,567,

7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,333,929, 7,548,853,

7,283,634, 7,853,022 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending. DTS-HD, the

Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

SC-LX85/SC-LX75

1999/5/EC.

Polski:

Niniejszym Pioneer oświadcza, że

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC

Norsk:

Pioneer erklærer herved at utstyret

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Íslenska:

SC-LX85/SC-LX75 er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC

R-TTE-24L_A1_En

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround

EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below.

See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.

About THX

The THX technologies are explained below.

See http://www.thx.com for more detailed information.



THX, the THX logo Ultra2 Plus and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which are registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.


THX Cinema processing

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by THX Ltd. THX grew from

George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.

Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the

THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema,

THX Surround EX).

surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.

Adaptive Decorrelation

In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates-with only two speakers- the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.

Re-Equalization

The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment.

Timbre Matching

The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the

THX Ultra2/Select2 Plus

Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2/Select2 Plus certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the

THX Ultra2/Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Ultra2/Select2 Plus requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain.

THX Surround EX

THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with

Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the

Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging.

A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at http:// www.dolby.com.

Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX

Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.

This product may also engage the “THX

Surround EX” mode during the playback of

5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener.

Boundary Gain Compensation

TM

Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener may experience an excessive bass effect. This feature compensates for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX

Ultra2/Select2 TM specifications.

THX Loudness Plus Description

THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus TM and

THX Select2 Plus TM Certified amplifiers. With

THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX Loudness

Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume setting.

THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX

Loudness Plus settings for each type of content.

About iPod

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple

En 109

14 Additional information performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

Apple, AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod shuffle, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch, iTunes and Mac are trademarks of Apple

Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

About FLAC

FLAC Decoder

Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005,

2006, 2007

Josh Coalson

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

!

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

!

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

!

Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE

COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.

IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION

OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS

OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR

PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats

The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the

Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 46) you have selected.

Stereo (2 channel) signal formats

Input signal format

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources

Analog sources

PCM sources

DVD-A sources

SACD sources

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources

Analog sources

PCM sources

DVD-A sources

SACD sources

Auto Surround / ALC /

DIRECT

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

Neo:X CINEMA

Stereo playback

As above

As above

As above

As above

2 Pro Logic II MOVIE

Neo:X CINEMA

Stereo playback

As above

As above

As above

As above

PURE DIRECT


Neo:X CINEMA

Stereo playback

ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM DIRECT

As above

Stereo playback

2 Pro Logic II MOVIE

Neo:X CINEMA

Stereo playback

ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM DIRECT

As above

Stereo playback

110 En


Multichannel signal formats

Input signal format

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Auto Surround / ALC

Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)

Dolby TrueHD EX (6.1 channel flagged)

Dolby Digital EX


<a>

DTS-HD Master Audio ES (6.1 channel flagged)

DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)

DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)

DTS-HD sources

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM

SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources

DTS-ES

DTS-ES

(Matrix)

(Matrix/Discrete)

Straight decoding

As above

As above

Straight decoding

As above

As above a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

PURE DIRECT / DIRECT

Dolby Digital EX


<a>

DTS-ES (Matrix)

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

Straight decoding

As above

As above

Straight decoding

As above

As above

Glossary

Audio formats/Decoding

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below.

See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era.

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for

EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby

Digital EX.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the

Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system.

Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.

Dolby Pro Logic IIz

Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontallyoriented sound field. The height channel strengthens the sound field’s sense of threedimensionality and air, producing presence and expansion.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below.

See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

A high definition audio technology by which signals can be transferred over HDMI cables.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.

DTS Neo:X

DTS Neo:X can generate 11.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources.

DTS Neural Surround

DTS Neural Surround can generate 7.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV).

En 111


THX

The THX technologies are explained below.

See http://www.thx.com for more detailed information.

THX Cinema

A mode for playing in a home theater environment the sound tracks of theater movies that have been recorded and edited for playback in large spaces such as movie theaters.

THX Music

A mode adjusted mainly for listening to music that has been masterized at a higher level than movie sound tracks.

THX Games

A mode for playing the sound of games with spatial fidelity. In many cases the sound is mixed in the same way as for movies, but this mode is meant for small environments rather than the large environments of theaters.

THX Surround EX

A mode using technology developed jointly by Dolby Laboratories and THX for creating a sound field behind the listeners.

THX Loudness Plus

A mode creating a rich, subtle surround sound field through optimal calibration of the volume and frequency response of the individual channels according to the volume level.

Decoding

A technology for converting digital signals that have been compressed upon recording by a digital signal processing circuit, etc., into the original signals. The term “decoding” (or

“matrix decoding”) is also used for the technology which converts 2-channel sound sources into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel signals into 6.1 or 7.1 channels.

Calibrating the sound field/

Improving the sound quality

Phase Control

The Phase Control technology incorporated into this receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position.

Full Band Phase Control

The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected.

Full Band Phase Control FRONT ALIGN

Full Band Phase Control calibrates frequency phase disturbances (group delay) for the full speaker band (Full Band) ( SYMMETRY ), but with this unit it is also possible to calibrate the frequency phase characteristics of other speakers to the frequency phase characteristics of the front speakers ( FRONT ALIGN ).

Virtual Surround Back

When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information.

Virtual Height

When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers.

Virtual Depth

When this mode is selected, the sound field expands virtually to behind the display, resulting in a sound field with the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence.

Auto Sound Retriever

The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs

DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left over after compression.

With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever effect is automatically optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents that have been input to achieve high sound quality.

Sound Retriever Air

Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced sound quality due to compression when sending Bluetooth signals.

PQLS

Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS-compatible player with

HDMI connections.

ALC (Auto Level Control)

In the Auto level control ( ALC ) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels.

Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night.

Front Stage Surround Advance

With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality of the original sound.

MCACC

The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic

Calibration EQ.

HDMI

Control with HDMI function

Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray

Disc player or with a component of another make that supports the Control with HDMI functions are possible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.

!

The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

!

The receiver’s input switches over automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

!

The receiver’s power is also set to standby, when the TV’s power is set to standby.

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio

Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal.

The sound of the TV can be input from the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection with the TV can be completed with a single

HDMI cable.

Network function

AirPlay

This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later, and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later.

For more information, see the Apple website

(http://www.apple.com).

DLNA

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home.

vTuner vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet. vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around

112 En

Additional information 14 the globe. For more detail about vTuner, visit the following website: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

“This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo.

Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.” aacPlus

AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding

Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com)

FLAC

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC without any loss in quality.

For more details about FLAC, visit the following website: http://flac.sourceforge.net/

Windows Media

Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distribution for Microsoft

Windows. Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

Use an application licensed by Microsoft

Corporation to author, distribute, or play

Windows Media formatted content. Using an application unauthorized by Microsoft

Corporation is subject to malfunction.

Windows Media Player 11/

Windows Media Player 12

Windows Media Player is software to deliver music, photos and movies from a Microsoft

Windows computer to home stereo systems and TVs.

With this software, you can play back files stored on the PC through various devices wherever you like in your home.

This software can be downloaded from

Microsoft’s website.

!

Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows XP or

Windows Vista)

!

Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7)

For more information check the official

Microsoft website.

Windows Media DRM

Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights

Management) service for the Windows Media platform. It is designed to provide secure delivery of audio and/or video content over an

IP network to a PC or other playback device in such a way that the distributor can control how that content is used. The WMDRM-protected content can only be played back on a component supporting the WMDRM service.

Router

A device for relaying data flowing on a network to another network. In homes, routers often also function as DHCP servers. Products with built-in wireless LAN access points are called

“wireless LAN routers”.

DHCP

Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration

Protocol. A protocol for automatically assigning such setting information as IP addresses within network connections. This offers convenience in that, when enabled, it allows network functions to be used simply by connecting the devices to the network.

Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi

“Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade association to increase recognition of wireless LAN standards. With the increase in the number of devices connected to computers in recent years, Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with

LAN cables by using wireless connection. As a way of reassuring users, products that have passed interoperability tests carry the logo

“Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is assured.

WPS

Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry group for a function allowing settings related to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless

LAN devices and encryption to be made with simple operations. There are a number of methods, including push-button configuration and

PIN code configuration. This AV receiver supports both push-button configuration and PIN code configuration.

SSID

Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wireless LAN access point identifier. Can be set as desired using up to 32 characters of English letters and numbers.

Bluetooth

function

Bluetooth wireless technology

A short-range wireless communications standard for digital devices. Information is exchanged between devices several meters to several tens of meters apart using radio waves.

It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which does not require applications for licenses or usage registration for applications conducting wireless exchange of digital information at relatively low speeds, such as computer mouses and keyboards, mobile phones, smartphones, text and audio information for PDAs, etc.

Pairing

“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared.

The pairing step is necessary to register the

Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable

Bluetooth communications. For more details, see also the operating instructions of your


!

Pairing is required when you first use the

Bluetooth wireless technology device and

Bluetooth ADAPTER.

!

To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing should be done with both your system and


Receiver function

Operation Mode

This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings.

En 113


114

Features index

Operation Mode

See Operation Mode Setup on page 36.

AVNavigator

See About using AVNavigator (included

CD-ROM) on page 8.

Full Auto MCACC

See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34.

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 80.

Manual MCACC setup

See Manual MCACC setup on page 82.

PQLS

See Setting the PQLS function on page 56.

Phase Control

See Better sound using Phase Control on page

47.

Full Band Phase Control

See Better sound using Phase Control and Full

Band Phase Control on page 48.

Standing Wave


Phase Control Plus


Auto Sound Retriever


ALC (Auto Level Control)

See Auto playback on page 45.

Front Stage Surround Advance

See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 45.

Sound Retriever Air

See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 45.

Dialog Enhancement


Internet radio

See Listening to Internet radio stations on page

50.

vTuner

See Listening to Internet radio stations on page

50.

DLNA

See About network playback on page 51.

AirPlay

See Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes on page 49.

Wireless LAN

See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 31.

Playback High Resolution audio file

See About playable file formats on page 53.

Slideshow

See Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device on page 40.

Bluetooth ADAPTER

See Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music on page 43.

ARC (Audio Return Channel)


SACD Gain


Auto delay


Height Gain (Dolby Pro Logic llz Height option)


Virtual Height


Virtual Surround Back


Virtual Depth


Digital Video Converter


En

Pure Cinema


Progressive Motion


Advanced Video Adjust


Auto Power Down

See The Other Setup menu on page 91.

Specifications

Audio Section

Multi channel simultaneous power output

(1 kHz, 1 %, 8 W )

9 ch total

................810 W (SC-LX85)/720 W (SC-LX75)

Rated power output (1 kHz, 6 W , 1 %)

Front .................... 190 W + 190 W (SC-LX85)

180 W + 180 W (SC-LX75)

Center ..................................190 W (SC-LX85)

180 W (SC-LX75)

Surround ............. 190 W + 190 W (SC-LX85)

180 W + 180 W (SC-LX75)

Surround back .... 190 W + 190 W (SC-LX85)

180 W + 180 W (SC-LX75)

Front height/Front wide

............................. 190 W + 190 W (SC-LX85)

180 W + 180 W (SC-LX75)

Rated power output

(1 kHz, 8 W , 0.08 %)

Front ..................................... 140 W + 140 W

Center ...................................................140 W

Surround .............................. 140 W + 140 W

Surround back ..................... 140 W + 140 W

Front height/Front wide ....... 140 W + 140 W

Total harmonic distortion .......................... 0.04 %

(1 kHz, 130 W + 130 W, 8 W )

Guaranteed speaker impedance ....... 6 W to 16 W

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

(IHF, short circuited, A network)

LINE .....................................................103 dB

Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)

PHONO MM ................................5 mV/47 k W

LINE .........................................400 mV/47 k W

Output (Level/Impedance)

REC .........................................380 mV/2.2 k W

Tuner Section

Frequency Range (FM) ......87.5 MHz to 108 MHz

Antenna Input (FM) .................. 75 W unbalanced

Frequency Range (AM) ........531 kHz to 1602 kHz

Antenna (AM) .............. Loop antenna (balanced)

Video Section

Signal level

Composite Video .......................1 Vp-p (75 W )

Component Video .............Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W ),

PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W )

Corresponding maximum resolution

Component Video ...................1080p (1125p)

(Video convert off)

Digital In/Out Section

HDMI terminal ............................19-pin (Not DVI)

HDMI output type .................................5 V, 55 mA

USB terminal ............USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A) iPod terminal ......... USB, and Video (Composite)

ADAPTER PORT terminal ..................5 V, 100 mA

WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal

.............................................................5 V, 600 mA

Integrated Control Section

Control (SR) terminal .....ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

Control (IR) terminal ......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

IR signal ...............High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)

12 V Trigger terminal ......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

12 V Trigger output type ..........12 V, Total 150 mA

RS-232C cable type ...................9-pin, cross type, female-female

SC-LX85 only:

CU-RF100 terminal .............................5 V, 150 mA

SC-LX75 only:

EXTENSION terminal .........................5 V, 150 mA

Network Section

LAN terminal .................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX

Miscellaneous

Power requirements

............................. AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power consumption ....................................370 W

In standby ..............................................0.1 W

(HDMI Setup – Control : OFF)

.............. 0.3 W (HDMI Setup – Control : ON)

Dimensions

....... 435 mm (W) x 185.6 mm (H) x 440.3 mm (D)

Weight (without package)

SC-LX85 .............................................. 17.9 kg

SC-LX75 .............................................. 17.6 kg

Number of Furnished Parts


MCACC Setup microphone ................................ 1

Omni-directionalremote control (CU-RF100) .... 1

RF adapter ........................................................... 1

IR blaster cable ................................................... 2

AA/LR6 dry cell batteries .................................... 4 iPod cable ............................................................ 1

Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300) ................. 1

AM loop antenna ................................................. 1

FM wire antenna ................................................. 1

Warranty card...................................................... 1

Power cord


Quick start guide


MCACC Setup microphone ................................ 1

Remote control unit ............................................ 1

AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries .................... 2 iPod cable ............................................................ 1

Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300) ................. 1

AM loop antenna ................................................. 1

FM wire antenna ................................................. 1

Warranty card...................................................... 1

Power cord


Quick start guide

Note

!

These specifications are applicable when the power supply is 230 V.

!

Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice, due to improvements.

!

This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.


En 115


Preset code list

SC-LX75 only

You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code.

Important

!

We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not be possible even if a preset code is entered.


116

TV

Pioneer 0180, 0185,

0186, 0187, 0189, 0192,

0193, 0198

A.R. Systems 0040

Acme 0026

Acura 0027, 0039

ADC 0025,

Admiral 0023, 0024,

0025, 0030, 0031

Adyson 0026, 0113, 0114

Agashi 0113, 0114

Agazi 0025

Aiko 0026, 0027, 0039,

0040, 0113, 0114

Aim 0040

Aiwa 0084

Akai 0027, 0028, 0034,

0037, 0039, 0040, 0113,

0114

Akiba 0028, 0040

Akura 0025, 0028, 0039,

0040

Alaron 0113

Alba 0010, 0026, 0027,

0028, 0032, 0035, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0075, 0078,

0088, 0113

Alcyon 0017

Allorgan 0114

Allstar 0034, 0040

AMOi 0109

Amplivision 0010, 0026,

0041, 0114

Amstrad 0025, 0027,

0028, 0039, 0040

Anam 0027

Anglo 0027, 0039

Anitech 0017, 0025,

0027, 0039, 0040

Ansonic 0010, 0018,

0027, 0029, 0039, 0040

Arcam 0113, 0114

Arcam Delta 0026

Aristona 0034, 0037,

0040

Arthur Martin 0041

ASA 0023, 0031

Asberg 0017, 0034, 0040

Astra 0027

Asuka 0025, 0026, 0028,

0113, 0114

Atlantic 0026, 0034,

0037, 0040, 0113

Atori 0027, 0039

Auchan 0041

Audiosonic 0010, 0026,

0027, 0028, 0034, 0037,

0040, 0114

AudioTon 0010, 0026,

0114

Ausind 0017

Autovox 0017, 0023,

0025, 0026, 0114

Awa 0113, 0114

Baird 0114

Bang & Olufsen 0023,

0115

Basic Line 0027, 0028,

0034, 0039, 0040, 0114

Bastide 0026, 0114

Baur 0037, 0040

Bazin 0114

Beko 0010, 0035, 0040,

0060

Benq 0104

Beon 0034, 0037, 0040

Best 0010

Bestar 0010, 0034, 0040

Binatone 0026, 0114

Blue Sky 0028, 0040

Blue Star 0036

Boots 0026, 0114

BPL 0036, 0040

En

Brandt 0033, 0038, 0042,

0044

Brinkmann 0040

Brionvega 0023, 0034,

0037, 0040

Britannia 0026, 0113,

0114

Bruns 0023

BTC 0028

Bush 0027, 0028, 0030,

0032, 0034, 0036, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0065, 0078,

0114

Capsonic 0025

Carena 0040

Carrefour 0032

Cascade 0027, 0039,

0040

Casio 0106

Cathay 0034, 0037, 0040

CCE 0114

Centurion 0034, 0037,

0040

Century 0023

CGE 0010, 0017

Cimline 0027, 0039

City 0027, 0039

Clarivox 0037

Clatronic 0010, 0017,

0025, 0026, 0027, 0028,

0034, 0035, 0039, 0040,

0114

CMS 0113

CMS Hightec 0114

Concorde 0027, 0039

Condor 0010, 0026,

0034, 0035, 0039, 0040,

0113

Contec 0026, 0027, 0032,

0039, 0113

Continental Edison

0033

Cosmel 0027, 0039

Crosley 0017, 0023

Crown 0010, 0017, 0027,

0034, 0035, 0037, 0039,

0040

CS Electronics 0026,

0028, 0113

CTC Clatronic 0029

Cybertron 0028

Daewoo 0013, 0026,

0027, 0034, 0039, 0040,

0054, 0064, 0091, 0113,

0114

Dainichi 0028, 0113

Dansai 0025, 0034, 0037,

0040, 0113, 0114

Dantax 0010, 0037

Dawa 0040

Daytron 0027, 0039

De Graaf 0030

Decca 0026, 0034, 0037,

0040, 0114

Denver 0098, 0103

Desmet 0034, 0037, 0040

Diamant 0040

Diamond 0113

Dixi 0027, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0114

DTS 0027, 0039

Dual 0026, 0040, 0114

Dual-Tec 0026, 0027

Dumont 0023, 0026,

0029, 0114

Dux 0037

Dynatron 0034, 0037,

0040

Elbe 0010, 0018, 0040,

0114

Elcit 0023

Electa 0036

ELECTRO TECH 0027

Elin 0026, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0113

Elite 0028, 0034, 0040

Elman 0029

Elta 0027, 0039, 0113

Emerson 0010, 0023,

0040

Epson 0101

Erres 0034, 0037, 0040

ESC 0114

Etron 0027

Eurofeel 0114, 0025

Euroline 0037

Euroman 0010, 0025,

0026, 0034, 0040, 0113,

0114

Europhon 0026, 0029,

0034, 0040, 0113, 0114

Expert 0041

Exquisit 0040

Fenner 0027, 0039

Ferguson 0033, 0037,

0038, 0042

Fidelity 0026, 0030,

0040, 0113

Filsai 0114

Finlandia 0030

Finlux 0017, 0023, 0026,

0029, 0034, 0037, 0040,

0114

Firstline 0026, 0027,

0034, 0039, 0040, 0113,

0114

Fisher 0010, 0023, 0026,

0032, 0035, 0114

Flint 0034, 0040

Formenti 0017, 0023,

0024, 0026, 0037, 0113

Formenti/Phoenix 0113

Fortress 0023, 0024

Fraba 0010, 0040

Friac 0010

Frontech 0025, 0027,

0030, 0031, 0039, 0114

Fujitsu 0114

Fujitsu General 0114

Funai 0025

Galaxi 0040, 0035

Galaxis 0010, 0040

GBC 0027, 0032, 0039

Geant Casino 0041

GEC 0026, 0031, 0034,

0037, 0040, 0114

Geloso 0027, 0030, 0039

General Technic 0027,

0039

Genexxa 0028, 0031,

0034, 0040

Giant 0114

GoldHand 0113

Goldline 0040

Goldstar 0010, 0026,

0027, 0030, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0113, 0114

Goodmans 0025, 0027,

0032, 0034, 0037, 0039,

0040, 0107, 0114

Gorenje 0010, 0035

GPM 0028

Graetz 0031

Granada 0017, 0026,

0030, 0032, 0034, 0037,

0040, 0041, 0114

Grandin 0027, 0028,

0036, 0037

Gronic 0114

Grundig 0009, 0010,

0017, 0040, 0047

Halifax 0025, 0026, 0113,

0114

Hampton 0026, 0113,

0114

Hanseatic 0010, 0018,

0026, 0027, 0032, 0034,

0037, 0039, 0040, 0114

Hantarex 0027, 0039,

0040

Hantor 0040

Harwood 0039, 0040

HCM 0025, 0026, 0027,

0036, 0039, 0040, 0114

Hema 0039, 0114

Higashi 0113

HiLine 0040

Hinari 0027, 0028, 0032,

0034, 0037, 0039, 0040

Hisawa 0028, 0036, 0041

Hitachi 0022, 0026, 0030,

0031, 0032, 0040, 0076,

0111, 0114

Hornyphon 0034, 0040

Hoshai 0028

Huanyu 0026, 0113

Hygashi 0026, 0113,

0114

Hyper 0026, 0027, 0039,

0113, 0114

Hypson 0025, 0026,

0034, 0036, 0037, 0040,

0041, 0114

Iberia 0040

ICE 0025, 0026, 0027,

0028, 0034, 0039, 0040,

0113, 0114

ICeS 0113

Imperial 0010, 0017,

0031, 0034, 0035, 0040

Indiana 0034, 0037, 0040

Ingelen 0031

Ingersol 0027, 0039

Inno Hit 0017, 0026,

0027, 0028, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0114

Innovation 0025, 0027

Interactive 0010

Interbuy 0027, 0039

Interfunk 0010, 0023,

0031, 0034, 0037, 0040

International 0113

Intervision 0010, 0025,

0026, 0029, 0040, 0114

Irradio 0017, 0027, 0028,

0034, 0037, 0039, 0040

Isukai 0028, 0040

ITC 0026, 0114

ITS 0028, 0034, 0036,

0040, 0113

ITT 0027, 0031

ITV 0027, 0037, 0040


JVC 0019, 0020, 0032,

0034, 0077, 5064

Kaisui 0026, 0027, 0028,

0036, 0039, 0040, 0113,

0114

Kamosonic 0026

Kamp 0026, 0113

Kapsch 0031

Karcher 0010, 0026,

0027, 0037, 0040

Kawasho 0113

Kendo 0010, 0029, 0030,

0040

KIC 0114

Kingsley 0026, 0113

Kneissel 0010, 0018,

0040

Kolster 0034, 0040

Konka 0028

Korpel 0034, 0037, 0040

Korting 0010, 0023

Kosmos 0040

Koyoda 0027

KTV 0026, 0114

Kyoto 0113, 0114

Lasat 0010

Lenco 0027, 0039

Lenoir 0026, 0027, 0039

Leyco 0025, 0034, 0037,

0040

LG 0010, 0021, 0026,

0027, 0030, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0071, 0074,

0081, 0105, 0113, 0114

LG/GoldStar 0014

Liesenk 0037

Liesenkotter 0040

Life 0025, 0027

Lifetec 0025, 0027, 0039,

0040

Lloyds 0039

Loewe 0010, 0018, 0040,

0051, 0052

Loewe Opta 0023, 0034,

0037

Luma 0030, 0037, 0039,

0040

Lumatron 0030, 0034,

0037, 0040, 0114

Lux May 0034

Luxor 0026, 0030, 0114

M Electronic 0026, 0027,

0031, 0033, 0034, 0037

Magnadyne 0023, 0029,

0037

Magnafon 0017, 0026,

0029, 0113

Magnum 0025, 0027

Mandor 0025

Manesth 0025, 0026,

0034, 0037, 0040, 0114

Marantz 0034, 0037,

0040

Marelli 0023

Mark 0034, 0037, 0039,

0040, 0113, 0114

Masuda 0114

Matsui 0026, 0027, 0030,

0032, 0034, 0037, 0039,

0040, 0114

Mediator 0034, 0037,

0040

Medion 0025, 0027, 0040

M-Electronic 0039, 0040,

0113, 0114

Melvox 0041

Memorex 0027, 0039

Memphis 0027, 0039

Mercury 0039, 0040

Metz 0023, 0184, 0185,

0186, 0187

Micromaxx 0025, 0027

Microstar 0025, 0027

Minerva 0017

Minoka 0034, 0040

Mitsubishi 0023, 0032,

0034, 0040, 0085

Mivar 0010, 0017, 0018,

0026, 0113, 0114

Motion 0017

MTC 0010, 0113

Multi System 0037

Multitech 0010, 0026,

0027, 0029, 0030, 0032,

0037, 0039, 0040, 0113,

0114

Murphy 0026, 0113

Naonis 0030

NEC 0032, 0114

Neckermann 0010, 0023,

0026, 0030, 0034, 0035,

0037, 0040, 0114

NEI 0034, 0037, 0040

Neufunk 0039, 0040

New Tech 0027, 0034,

0039, 0040, 0114

New World 0028

Nicamagic 0026, 0113

Nikkai 0025, 0026, 0028,

0034, 0037, 0039, 0040,

0113, 0114

Nobliko 0017, 0026,

0029, 0113

Nokia 0031

Nordic 0114

Nordmende 0023, 0031,

0033, 0034

Nordvision 0037

Novatronic 0040

Oceanic 0031, 0041

Okano 0010, 0035, 0040

ONCEAS 0026

Opera 0040

Orbit 0034, 0040

Orion 0027, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0079

Orline 0040

Osaki 0025, 0026, 0028,

0040, 0114

Oso 0028

Otto Versand 0024,

0026, 0032, 0034, 0036,

0037, 0040, 0114

Pael 0026, 0113

Palladium 0010, 0026,

0035, 0040, 0114

Palsonic 0114

Panama 0025, 0026,

0027, 0039, 0040, 0113,

0114

Panasonic 0008, 0031,

0040, 0043, 0049, 0099,

0102, 0194, 0191, 0195,

0196, 0197, 0190

Panavision 0040

Pathe Cinema 0010,

0018, 0026, 0041, 0113

Pausa 0027, 0039

Perdio 0040, 0113

Perfekt 0040

Philco 0010, 0017, 0023,

0040

Philharmonic 0026, 0114

Philips 0000, 0002, 0023,

0026, 0034, 0037, 0040,

0045, 0048, 0050, 0055,

0056, 0058, 0059, 0067,

0068, 0080, 0081, 0087,

0090, 0097, 0100

Phoenix 0010, 0023,

0034, 0037, 0040, 0113

Phonola 0023, 0034,

0037, 0040, 0113

Plantron 0025, 0034,

0039, 0040

Playsonic 0114

Poppy 0027, 0039

Prandoni-Prince 0017,

0030

Precision 0026, 0114

Prima 0027, 0031, 0039

Profex 0027, 0039

Profi-Tronic 0034, 0040

Proline 0034, 0040

Prosonic 0010, 0026,

0037, 0040, 0113, 0114,

0117

Protech 0025, 0026,

0027, 0029, 0034, 0037,

0114

Provision 0037, 0040

Pye 0034, 0037, 0040,

0083

Pymi 0027, 0039

Quandra Vision 0041

Quelle 0025, 0026, 0034,

0037, 0040, 0114

Questa 0032

Radialva 0040

Radio Shack 0040

Radiola 0034, 0037,

0040, 0114

Radiomarelli 0023, 0040

Radiotone 0010, 0034,

0039, 0040

Rank 0032

Recor 0040

Redstar 0040

Reflex 0040

Revox 0010, 0034, 0037,

0040,

Rex 0025, 0030, 0031

RFT 0010, 0018, 0023

Rhapsody 0113

R-Line 0034, 0037, 0040

Roadstar 0025, 0027,

0028, 0039

Robotron 0023

Rowa 0113, 0114

Royal Lux 0010

RTF 0023

Saba 0023, 0031, 0033,

0038, 0042, 0044

Saisho 0025, 0026, 0027,

0039, 0114

Salora 0030, 0031

Sambers 0017, 0029

Samsung 0004, 0005,

0010, 0025, 0026, 0027,

0034, 0035, 0037, 0039,

0040, 0062, 0063, 0066,

0089, 0093, 0113, 0114

Sandra 0026, 0113, 0114

Sansui 0034, 0040

Sanyo 0010, 0018, 0026,

0032, 0039, 0072, 0113,

0114

SBR 0037, 0040

SCHAUB LORENTZ 0031

Schneider 0026, 0028,

0034, 0037, 0040, 0075,

0114

SEG 0025, 0026, 0029,

0032, 0037, 0039, 0040,

0075, 0113, 0114

SEI 0040

SEI-Sinudyne 0023,

0029, 0031

Seleco 0030, 0031, 0032

Sencora 0027, 0039

Sentra 0039

Serino 0113

Sharp 0015, 0016, 0024,

0032, 0069, 0092

Siarem 0023, 0029, 0040

Sierra 0034, 0040

Siesta 0010

Silva 0113

Silver 0032

Singer 0023, 0029, 0041

Sinudyne 0023, 0029,

0037, 0040

Skantic 0031

Solavox 0031

Sonitron 0010, 0114

Sonoko 0025, 0026,

0027, 0034, 0037, 0039,

0040, 0114

Sonolor 0031, 0041

Sontec 0010, 0034, 0037,

0040

Sony 0001, 0003, 0027,

0032, 0046, 0053, 0057,

0070, 0073, 0082, 0086,

0096, 0110, 0112

Sound & Vision 0028,

0029

Soundwave 0034, 0037,

0040

Standard 0026, 0027,

0028, 0034, 0039, 0040,

0114

Starlight 0037

Starlite 0039, 0040

Stenway 0036

Stern 0030, 0031

Strato 0039, 0040

Stylandia 0114

Sunkai 0027,

Sunstar 0039, 0040

Sunwood 0027, 0034,

0039, 0040

Superla 0026, 0113, 0114

SuperTech 0039, 0040,

0113

Supra 0027, 0039

Susumu 0028

Sutron 0027, 0039

Sydney 0026, 0113, 0114

Sysline 0037

Sytong 0113

Tandy 0024, 0026, 0028,

0031, 0114

Tashiko 0029, 0030,

0032, 0113, 0114

Tatung 0026, 0034, 0037,

0040, 0114

TCM 0025, 0027

Teac 0040, 0114

Tec 0026, 0027, 0039,

0114

TEDELEX 0114

Teleavia 0033

Telecor 0040, 0114

Telefunken 0033, 0034,

0040, 0042

Telegazi 0040

Telemeister 0040

Telesonic 0040

Telestar 0040

Teletech 0027, 0037,

0039, 0040

Teleton 0026, 0114

Televideon 0113

Televiso 0041

Tensai 0027, 0028, 0034,

0039, 0040, 0114

Tesmet 0034

Tevion 0025, 0027

Texet 0026, 0039, 0113,

0114

Thomson 0006, 0007,

0026, 0033, 0034, 0038,

0040, 0042, 0044, 0095

Thorn 0037, 0040

Tokai 0034, 0040, 0114

Tokyo 0026, 0113

Tomashi 0036

Toshiba 0011, 0012,

0032, 0061, 0094, 0114

Towada 0031, 0114

Trakton 0114

Trans Continens 0040,

0114

Transtec 0113

Trident 0114

Triumph 0040

Vestel 0030, 0031, 0034,

0035, 0037, 0040, 0114

Vexa 0027, 0037, 0039,

0040

Victor 0032, 0034

VIDEOLOGIC 0113

Videologique 0026,

0028, 0113, 0114

VideoSystem 0034, 0040

Videotechnic 0113, 0114

Viewsonic 0108

Visiola 0026, 0113

Vision 0034, 0040, 0114

Vortec 0034, 0037, 0040

Voxson 0017, 0023,

0030, 0031, 0034, 0040

Waltham 0026, 0040,

0114

Watson 0034, 0037, 0040

Watt Radio 0026, 0029,

0113

Wega 0023, 0032, 0040

Wegavox 0039

Weltblick 0034, 0037,

0040, 0114

White Westinghouse

0026, 0029, 0037, 0040,

0113

Xrypton 0040

Yamishi 0040, 0114

Yokan 0040

Yoko 0010, 0025, 0026,

0027, 0028, 0034, 0037,

0039, 0040, 0113, 0114

Yorx 0028

Zanussi 0030, 0114

En 117


118

DVD

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the BD , DVR (BDR, HDR) .

Pioneer 2246, 2215

AEG 2093

Aiwa 2054

Akai 2001

Akura 2091

Alba 2027, 2038, 2048

Amitech 2093

AMW 2094

Awa 2094

Bang & Olufsen 2096

Bellagio 2094

Best Buy 2090

Brainwave 2093

Brandt 2017, 2044

Bush 2027, 2048, 2082,

2089

Cambridge Audio 2085

CAT 2087, 2088

Centrum 2088

CGV 2085, 2093

Cinetec 2094

Clatronic 2089

Coby 2095

Conia 2082

Continental Edison

2094

Crown 2093

C-Tech 2086

CyberHome 2008, 2037

Daenyx 2094

Daewoo 2035, 2059,

2093, 2094

Daewoo International

2094

Dalton 2092

Dansai 2084, 2093

Daytek 2010, 2033, 2094

Dayton 2094

DEC 2089

Decca 2093

Denon 2066, 2068

Denver 2069, 2089,

2091, 2095

Denzel 2083

Diamond 2085, 2086

DK Digital 2034

Dmtech 2000

Dual 2083

DVX 2086

Easy Home 2090

Eclipse 2085

Electrohome 2093

Elin 2093

Elta 2047, 2093

Enzer 2083

Finlux 2085, 2093

Gericom 2050

Global Solutions 2086

Global Sphere 2086


2089

Graetz 2083

Grundig 2053

Grunkel 2093

H&B 2089

Haaz 2085, 2086

HiMAX 2090

Hitachi 2015, 2083, 2090

Innovation 2002

JVC 2024, 2041, 2057

Kansai 2095

Kennex 2093

Kenwood 2051

KeyPlug 2093

Kiiro 2093

Kingavon 2089

Kiss 2083

Koda 2089

KXD 2090

Lawson 2086

Lecson 2084

Lenco 2089, 2093

LG 2016, 2020, 2040,

2043, 2065, 2076

Life 2002

Lifetec 2002

Limit 2086

Loewe 2056

LogicLab 2086

Magnavox 2089

Majestic 2095

Marantz 2062

Marquant 2093

Matsui 2044

Mecotek 2093

Medion 2002

MiCO 2085

Micromaxx 2002

Microstar 2002

Minoka 2093

Mizuda 2089, 2090

Monyka 2083

Mustek 2006

Mx Onda 2085

Naiko 2093

Neufunk 2083

Nevir 2093

NU-TEC 2082

Onkyo 2072

Optim 2084

Optimus 2004

Orava 2089

Orbit 2094

Orion 2061

P&B 2089

Pacific 2086


2026, 2032, 2036, 2075

Philips 2005, 2011, 2022,

2023, 2031, 2039, 2062

Pointer 2093

Portland 2093

Powerpoint 2094

Prosonic 2095

Provision 2089

Raite 2083

RedStar 2091, 2093,

2095

Reoc 2086

Roadstar 2021, 2089

Ronin 2094

Rowa 2082

Rownsonic 2088

Saba 2017, 2044

Sabaki 2086

Saivod 2093

Samsung 2015, 2042,

2063, 2078, 2081

Sansui 2085, 2086, 2093

Sanyo 2045, 2071

ScanMagic 2006

Schaub Lorenz 2093

Schneider 2000

Scientific Labs 2086

Scott 2025, 2092

SEG 2021, 2083, 2086,

2094

Sharp 2002, 2046, 2079

Sigmatek 2090

Silva 2091

Singer 2085, 2086

Skymaster 2058, 2086

Skyworth 2091

Slim Art 2093

SM Electronic 2086

Sony 2009, 2013, 2028,

2029, 2030, 2055, 2080

Soundmaster 2086

Soundmax 2086

Spectra 2094

Standard 2086

Star Cluster 2086

Starmedia 2089

Sunkai 2093

Supervision 2086

Synn 2086

En

Tatung 2035, 2093

TCM 2002

Teac 2067, 2082, 2086

Tec 2091

Technika 2093

Telefunken 2088

Tensai 2093

Tevion 2002, 2086, 2092

Thomson 2003, 2017,

2060, 2064

Tokai 2083, 2091

Toshiba 2007, 2061,

2073, 2074, 2077

TRANScontinents 2094

Trio 2093

TruVision 2090

Wharfedale 2085, 2086

Xbox 2003

Xlogic 2086, 2093

XMS 2093

Yamada 2094

Yamaha 2011

Yamakawa 2083, 2094

Yukai 2006, 2052

BD

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD , DVR (BDR, HDR) .

Pioneer 2247, 2248

Denon 2212, 2213, 2214

Hitachi 2209, 2210, 2211

JVC 2192, 2193, 2195,

2196, 2197, 2198

Kenwood 2109

LG 2188, 2189

Marantz 2204, 2205

Mitsubishi 2202, 2203

Onkyo 2191


2181

Philips 2182

Samsung 2184

Sharp 2206, 2207, 2208

Sony 2185, 2186, 2187,

2194

Toshiba 2190, 2164

Yamaha 2199, 2200,

2201

DVR (BDR, HDR)

If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD , BD .

Pioneer 2238, 2239,

2240, 2241, 2242, 2243,

2244, 2245

Panasonic 2165, 2171

Sharp 2169, 2177

Sony 2170, 2173, 2174,

2175, 2178

Toshiba 2176

VCR

Pioneer 1077

Adyson 1017

Aiwa 1000, 1001, 1002

Akai 1001

Akiba 1007, 1017

Akura 1001, 1007, 1017

Alba 1002, 1003, 1004,

1007, 1017, 1018

Ambassador 1004

Amstrad 1000, 1017,

1018

Anitech 1007, 1017

ASA 1005, 1006

Asuka 1000, 1005, 1006,

1007, 1017

Audiosonic 1018

Baird 1000, 1001, 1003,

1018

Bang & Olufsen 1019

Basic Line 1002, 1003,

1004, 1007, 1017, 1018

Baur 1006

Bestar 1003, 1004, 1018

Black Panther Line

1003, 1018

Blaupunkt 1006

Bondstec 1004, 1017

Bush 1002, 1003, 1007,

1017, 1018

Cathay 1018

Catron 1004

CGE 1000, 1001

Cimline 1002, 1007, 1017

Clatronic 1004, 1017

Condor 1003, 1004, 1018

Crown 1003, 1004, 1007,

1017, 1018

Daewoo 1003, 1004,

1018

Dansai 1007, 1017, 1018

Dantax 1002

Daytron 1003, 1018

De Graaf 1006

Decca 1000, 1001, 1006

Denko 1017

Dual 1001, 1027, 1018

Dumont 1000, 1006

Elbe 1018

Elcatech 1017

Elsay 1017

Elta 1007, 1017, 1018

Emerson 1017

ESC 1003, 1018

Etzuko 1007, 1017

Ferguson 1001

Fidelity 1000, 1017

Finlandia 1006

Finlux 1000, 1001, 1006

Firstline 1002, 1005,

1007, 1017

Flint 1002

Formenti/Phoenix 1006

Frontech 1004

Fujitsu 1000

Funai 1000

Galaxy 1000

GBC 1004, 1007


GEC 1006

Geloso 1007

General 1004

General Technic 1002

GoldHand 1007, 1017

Goldstar 1000, 1015


1004, 1005, 1007, 1017,

1018

Graetz 1001

Granada 1006

Grandin 1000, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1007, 1017,

1018

Grundig 1006 ,1007

Hanseatic 1005, 1006,

1018

Harwood 1017

HCM 1007, 1017

Hinari 1002, 1007, 1017,

1018

Hisawa 1002

Hitachi 1000, 1001, 1006,

1012

Hypson 1002, 1007,

1017, 1018

Impego 1004

Imperial 1000

Inno Hit 1003, 1004,

1006, 1007, 1017, 1018

Innovation 1002

Interbuy 1005, 1017

Interfunk 1006

Intervision 1000, 1018

Irradio 1005, 1007, 1017

ITT 1001

ITV 1003, 1005, 1018

JVC 1001, 1013

Kaisui 1007, 1017

Karcher 1006

Kendo 1002, 1003, 1004,

1017

Korpel 1007, 1017

Kyoto 1017

Lenco 1003

Leyco 1007, 1017

LG 1000, 1005, 1016

Lifetec 1002

Loewe Opta 1005, 1006

Logik 1007, 1017

Lumatron 1003, 1018

Luxor 1017

M Electronic 1000

Manesth 1007, 1017

Marantz 1006

Mark 1018

Matsui 1002, 1005

Matsushita 1000, 1006

Mediator 1006

Medion 1002

Memorex 1000, 1005

Memphis 1007, 1017

Micromaxx 1002

Microstar 1002

Migros 1000

Multitech 1000, 1004,

1006, 1007, 1017

Murphy 1000

NEC 1001

Neckermann 1001, 1006

NEI 1006

Nesco 1007, 1017

Nikkai 1004, 1017, 1018

Nokia 1001, 1018

Nordmende 1001

Oceanic 1000, 1001

Okano 1002, 1017, 1018

Orion 1002

Orson 1000

Osaki 1000, 1005, 1007,

1017

Otto Versand 1006

Palladium 1001, 1005,

1007, 1017

Panasonic 1010

Pathe Marconi 1001

Perdio 1000

Philco 1017

Philips 1006, 1012, 1019

Phonola 1006

Portland 1003, 1004,

1018

Prinz 1000

Profex 1007

Proline 1000

Prosonic 1002, 1018

Pye 1006

Quelle 1000, 1006

Radialva 1017

Radiola 1006

Rex 1001

RFT 1004, 1006, 1017

Roadstar 1003, 1005,

1007, 1017, 1018

Royal 1017

Saba 1001

Saisho 1002, 1007

Samsung 1008

Samurai 1004, 1017

Sansui 1001

Saville 1018

SBR 1006

Schaub Lorenz 1000,

1001

Schneider 1000, 1002,

1003, 1004, 1005, 1006,

1007, 1017, 1018

SEG 1007, 1017, 1018

SEI-Sinudyne 1006

Seleco 1001

Sentra 1004, 1017

Sentron 1007, 1017

Sharp 1009

Shintom 1007, 1017

Shivaki 1005

Siemens 1005

Silva 1005

Silver 1018

Sinudyne 1006

Solavox 1004

Sonneclair 1017

Sonoko 1003, 1018

Sontec 1005

Sony 1011

Standard 1003, 1018

Stern 1018

Sunkai 1002

Sunstar 1000

Suntronic 1000

Sunwood 1007, 1017

Symphonic 1017

Taisho 1002

Tandberg 1018

Tashiko 1000

Tatung 1000, 1001, 1006

TCM 1002

Teac 1018

Tec 1004, 1017, 1018

Teleavia 1001

Telefunken 1001

Teletech 1017, 1018

Tenosal 1007, 1017

Tensai 1000, 1005, 1007,

1017

Tevion 1002

Thomson 1001, 1015

Thorn 1001

Tokai 1005, 1007, 1017

Tonsai 1007

Toshiba 1001, 1006,

1014

Towada 1007, 1017

Towika 1007, 1017

TVA 1004

Uher 1005

Ultravox 1018

United Quick Star 1003,

1018

Universum 1000, 1005,

1006

Videon 1002

Weltblick 1005

Yamishi 1007, 1017

Yokan 1007, 1017

Yoko 1004, 1005, 1007,

1017

Satellite Set Top Box

Pioneer 6096, 6095,

6080, 6176, 0196

@sat 6127

@Sky 6114

ABsat 6056

Acoustic Solutions 6093

ADB 6050

Akai 6090

Akura 6104

Alba 6052, 6076, 6056,

6093

Allsat 6090

Alltech 6056

Allvision 6128, 6114,

6075

Amitronica 6056

Ampere 6132, 6137

Amstrad 6132, 6137,

6112, 6056, 6078, 6119

Anglo 6056

Ankaro 6056

Ansonic 6121

Anttron 6076

Apollo 6052

Apro 6108

Arcon 6068

Arcus 6069

Armstrong 6090

Arnion 6127

ASA 6106

Asat 6090

ASCI 6089, 6114

ASLF 6056

AssCom 6096

Astra 6131, 6056

Astratec 6144, 6145

Astrell 6078

Astro 6053, 6112, 6131,

6076, 6122, 6091, 6098,

6119

Atlanta 6121

Atsat 6127

AtSky 6114

Audioline 6108

Audioton 6076

Austar 6050

Avalon 6137

Axil 6120, 6062, 6121

Axis 6143

Axitronic 6104

B.net

6108

B@ytronic 6106, 6075

BELL 6191

Balmet 6062

Beko 6052

Belson 6121

Big Sat 6062

Black Diamond 6093

Blaupunkt 6053

Blue Sky 6056

Boca 6132, 6056, 6128,

6061, 6133, 6113, 6063,

6064

Bodner & Mann 6070

Boshmann 6120, 6123

Boston 6103

Brainwave 6107, 6108

British Sky

Broadcasting 6086

Broco 6056

BskyB 6086

BT 6071

Bubu Sat 6056

Bush 6130, 6093, 6140,

6104, 6108, 6144, 6077,

6066, 6141, 6058

Cambridge 6112

Canal Digital 6096

Canal Satellite 6096,

6095, 6154, 6153

Canal+ 6096, 6153

CGV 6120, 6059

Cherokee 6070

Chess 6089, 6056, 6114,

6104

CityCom 6105, 6131,

6128, 6055, 6068, 6117

Clark 6076

Classic 6108

Clatronic 6120

Clayton 6104

Clemens Kamphus 6137

Cobra 6137

Colombia 6132

Columbia 6132

Comag 6132, 6128, 6061,

6075, 6120, 6133, 6113,

6065, 6135, 6063, 6064

Comsat 6120

Condor 6131, 6129

Connexions 6137

Conrad 6132, 6112,

6083, 6131

Coship 6062, 6108

Crown 6093

Cryptovision 6052

CS 6123

Cyfrowy Polsat 6096

Cyrus 6090

D-box 6151

Daewoo 6143, 6056,

6071, 6144, 6058

Dantax 6104

Deltasat 6068

Denver 6121

Digatron 6107

Digenius 6105, 6102

Digiality 6131, 6114

Digifusion 6144, 6145

Digihome 6093, 6141,

6094

DigiLogic 6093

DigiQuest 6127, 6062,

6123

DigiSat 6128

Digisky 6062

Digital 6063

Digital Vision 6145

DigitalBox 6098, 6123

Dijam 6071

DirecTV 6139

Discovery 6070

Distratel 6078, 6126

DMT 6068

DNT 6090, 6137

Doro 6108

Dual 6128

Durabrand 6093, 6094

DX Antenna 6171

E Aichi 6172

Echolink 6061

Echostar 6096, 6057,

6115, 6109, 6137, 6052,

6056, 6177

Edision 6123

Einhell 6132, 6112, 6056

Elap 6056, 6120, 6059

Elbe 6121

Elless 6106

Elsat 6056

Elta 6090 eMTech 6072

Energy Sistem 6123

Engel 6056, 6103

EP Sat 6052

Eurieult 6078

Eurocrypt 6052

EuroLine 6103

Europa 6112, 6131

Europhon 6132, 6105,

6131

Eurosat 6065

Eurosky 6132, 6089,

6105, 6112, 6131, 6106

Eurostar 6131, 6055

Eutelsat 6056

Eutra 6106

Evesham 6094

Exator 6076

Fagor 6079

Fenner 6056

Ferguson 6052, 6140,

6144, 6145

Fidelity 6112

Finlandia 6052

Finlux 6052, 6083, 6104

FinnSat 6106

Flair Mate 6056

Fly Com 6062

FMD 6089, 6120, 6062

En 119


120

Freecom 6112

FTEmaximal 6056, 6065

Fuba 6053, 6105, 6137,

6083, 6102, 6072

Fujitsu 6164, 6165, 6166

Galaxis 6096, 6143

Gardiner 6055

Garnet 6068

GbSAT 6072

Gecco 6122, 6075

General Satellite 6117

Globo 6106, 6103, 6114,

6075, 6133

GOD Digital 6090

Gold Box 6096, 6095

Gold Vision 6123

Golden Interstar 6126


6093, 6140, 6147, 6066,

6094, 6077

Gran Prix 6106

Granada 6052

Grandin 6104

Grocos 6115, 6062

Grundig 6108, 6096,

6053, 6093, 6140, 6094,

6077, 6066

Haensel & Gretel 6132

Haier 6121

Hama 6059

Hanseatic 6091, 6098

Hauppauge 6107, 6108

HB 6072

Heliocom 6131

Helium 6131

Hiro 6065

Hirschmann 6143, 6053,

6105, 6137, 6112, 6083,

6131, 6106, 6128, 6075,

6065

Hitachi 6052, 6094, 6093,

6163

HNE 6132

Hornet 6127

Houston 6137

Humax 6117, 6118, 6144

Huth 6132, 6131, 6068,

6069

Hyundai 6068

ID Digital 6117

ILLUSION sat 6123

Imperial 6098, 6092,

6099, 6114, 6108

Ingelen 6089, 6137

Inno Hit 6104

International 6132

Interstar 6072

Intervision 6131

Inves 6144 iotronic 6120

ITT Nokia 6083, 6052

Jaeger 6114

JERROLD 6159, 6180,

6181, 6182, 6183, 6184,

6185, 6186, 6187, 6188

K-SAT 6056

Kamm 6056

Kaon 6127

KaTelco 6143

Kathrein 6053, 6090,

6089, 6055, 6138, 6076,

6148, 6059, 6056

Kendo 6128

Kenwood 6096

Key West 6132

Kiton 6089

KR 6076

Kreiling 6089, 6104,

6070

Kreiselmeyer 6053

Kyostar 6076

L&S Electronic 6132,

6114

Labgear 6071

LaSAT 6053, 6132, 6105,

6131, 6106

Leiko 6104

Lemon 6114

Lenco 6131, 6056

Lenson 6112

LG 6068

Lifesat 6132, 6105, 6056

Listo 6104

En

Lodos 6093

Logik 6093

Logix 6068

Lorenzen 6132, 6105,

6131, 6102, 6107, 6133,

6113

Luxor 6112, 6083, 6141

M Electronic 6055

Manata 6132, 6056

Manhattan 6052, 6127

Marantz 6090

Maspro 6053, 6056

Matsui 6053, 6093, 6147,

6104, 6144, 6145

Max 6131

Maximum 6068, 6114

Mediabox 6096, 6095

Mediacom 6074

MediaSat 6096, 6095,

6112, 6154, 6153

Medion 6132, 6105,

6056, 6106, 6068, 6128,

6114, 6075, 6104

Medison 6056

Mega 6090

MegaSat 6065

Metronic 6132, 6076,

6056, 6055, 6078, 6126,

6114, 6120

Metz 6053

Micro 6112, 6131, 6076,

6056, 6107

Micro Elektronic 6056

Micro Technology 6056

Micromaxx 6105

Microstar 6105, 6068,

6102

Microtec 6056

Mitsubishi 6052

Morgan’s 6090, 6132,

6056, 6128, 6075

Multibroadcast 6050

Multichoice 6050

Myryad 6090

Mysat 6056

MySky 6087, 6088

NEC 6162

NEOTION 6114

Netsat 6139

Neuhaus 6112, 6131,

6056

Neuling 6132, 6128,

6133, 6064

Neusat 6056

Neveling 6102

Newton 6137

NextWave 6069

Nichimen 6130

Nikko 6056, 6090

Noda Electronic 6078

Nokia 6052, 6083, 6096,

6082

Nordmende 6052

Octagon 6076

OctalTV 6107

Onn 6093, 6094

Opentel 6128, 6075

Optex 6089, 6056, 6126,

6120, 6079, 6104

Orbis 6128, 6114, 6075

Orbitech 6089, 6112,

6091, 6098, 6092, 6099

P/Sat 6128

Pace 6149, 6096, 6090,

6088, 6087, 6057, 6052

Pacific 6093

Packard Bell 6143

Palcom 6105, 6102, 6115

Palladium 6137, 6112

Palsat 6112


6167, 6168, 6169

Panda 6053, 6052, 6131

Pansat 6067

Pass 6059

Patriot 6132 peeKTon 6062, 6121

Philips 6096, 6053, 6090,

6151, 6095, 6139, 6153,

6144, 6108, 6055, 6076,

6052

Phoenix 6121

Phonotrend 6109

Pilotime 6154

Pino 6114

Pixx 6067

Planet 6137

PMB 6056, 6079

Polytron 6137

Portland 6071

Preisner 6132, 6137,

6119, 6061

Premier 6095

Primacom 6143

Primestar 6178

Pro Basic 6096, 6060

Proline 6093

Promax 6052

Proscan 6110

Quelle 6105, 6131

Radiola 6090

Radix 6137, 6119

Rainbow 6076

RCA 6110, 6173, 6175,

6179

Rebox 6072

Regal 6103

RFT 6090

Roadstar 6096, 6056

Rollmaster 6120

Rover 6056

Rownsonic 6059

SA 6155, 6157, 6189,

6190

SAB 6103, 6127

Saba 6060, 6131, 6106,

6078

Sabre 6052

Sagem 6151, 6134, 6153

Saivod 6121

Salora 6128

Samsung 6096, 6074,

6073, 6149, 6129

Sanyo 6104

SAT 6112

Sat Control 6127

Sat Partner 6112, 6076

Sat Team 6056

SAT+ 6115

Satcom 6131

Satec 6056

Satelco 6128

Satplus 6098

SatyCon 6123

Schaecke 6076

Schaub Lorenz 6072,

6121

Schneider 6074, 6103

Schwaiger 6143, 6132,

6138, 6131, 6106, 6078,

6068, 6114, 6075, 6064,

6062, 6133, 6123, 6108,

6063

Scientific Atlanta 6085

SCS 6105, 6106

Sedea Electronique

6132, 6089, 6074, 6126,

6104

Seemann 6137

SEG 6089, 6068, 6103,

6093, 6104

SEI 6170

Septimo 6078

Serd 6075

Servimat 6079

ServiSat 6056, 6103

Shark 6123

Sharp 6141, 6094

Siemens 6053, 6137,

6114

Sigmatek 6121

Silva 6105

SilverCrest 6135, 6063

Skantin 6056

SKR 6056

SKT 6132

SKY 6139, 6086, 6088,

6087

SKY Italia 6096, 6088

Sky XL 6103, 6075

Skymaster 6109, 6056,

6068, 6114, 6115, 6060,

6059, 6079

Skymax 6090, 6120

Skypex 6106

Skyplus 6075, 6106,

6128, 6114

SkySat 6089, 6112, 6131,

6056

Skyvision 6114

SL 6132, 6105, 6106,

6107, 6133, 6108

SM Electronic 6109,

6056, 6115

Smart 6132, 6137, 6056,

6119, 6128, 6122, 6123,

6120, 6133

SmartVision 6062

Sony 6111, 6096, 6095,

6052, 6174

SR 6132

Star Sat 6072

Starland 6056

Starlite 6090

Stream 6088

Stream System 6127

Strong 6096, 6121, 6132,

6076, 6056, 6104, 6093,

6115

Sumin 6075

Sunny 6127

Sunsat 6056

Sunstar 6050, 6132

SuperMax 6069

Supratech 6120

Systec 6114

Tantec 6052

Targa 6067

Tatung 6052

TBoston 6103, 6121

Tecatel 6109

Technical 6104

Technika 6093, 6108,

6094

TechniSat 6089, 6137,

6052, 6112, 6091, 6098,

6092, 6099

Technomate 6126

Technosat 6069

Technosonic 6130, 6108

Technotrend 6108

Technowelt 6132, 6131

Techwood 6089, 6093,

6104, 6094

Telasat 6131

TELE System 6137, 6079,

6103, 6115

Teleciel 6076

Teleka 6137, 6112, 6131,

6076

Telesat 6131

Telestar 6089, 6112,

6091, 6098, 6092, 6099,

6103, 6114, 6108, 6104

Teletech 6089

Televes 6132, 6052,

6112, 6072, 6127, 6114,

6133

Telewire 6128

Tempo 6069

Tevion 6130, 6056, 6115,

6108, 6060

Thomson 6110, 6096,

6086, 6088, 6095, 6056,

6131, 6052, 6141, 6153,

6140

Thorn 6052

Tiny 6108

Tioko 6132

Titan 6065, 6060

TNT SAT 6134

Tokai 6090

Tonna 6052, 6112, 6056,

6079

Topfield 6074

Toshiba 6052, 6093,

6161

Trevi 6103

Triasat 6112

Triax 6096, 6090, 6132,

6135, 6065, 6129, 6104,

6079, 6137, 6089, 6133,

6120, 6071, 6140, 6103,

6119, 6056, 6112

Turnsat 6056

Twinner 6056, 6079

Unisat 6090, 6132

United 6103

Univers 6065


Universum 6053, 6089,

6105, 6131, 6106, 6091,

6103

Van Hunen 6102

Variosat 6053

VEA 6121

Ventana 6090

Vestel 6089, 6103, 6093,

6094

VH Sat 6105

Viasat 6149

Viola Digital 6108

Vision 6104, 6065

Visionic 6126

Visiosat 6089, 6130,

6056, 6120, 6062, 6067

Vitecom 6120

Volcasat 6121

VTech 6055

Wetekom 6112

Wewa 6052

Wharfedale 6093, 6141,

6094

Wisi 6053, 6132, 6105,

6137, 6052, 6112, 6131,

6106, 6128, 6075

Worldsat 6089, 6072,

6103, 6070

WorthIt!

6066

Woxter 6121

Xoro 6067

Xsat 6057, 6056, 6072

Xtreme 6127

Yakumo 6120

ZapMaster 6106

Zehnder 6089, 6138,

6055, 6068, 6128, 6103,

6114, 6075, 6120, 6123,

6125

ZENITH 6156, 6158, 6160

Zeta Technology 6090

Zodiac 6137, 6076

Pulsar 6116

Runco 6116

Sagem 6136

Salora 6116

Samsung 6097, 6116


StarHub 6152

Supercable 6152

Telewest 6101

Thomson 6146, 6100

Toshiba 6116

UPC 6146

US Electronics 6152

Virgin Media 6097, 6101

Visiopass 6136

Zenith 6116

Ziggo 6084

Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)

Freebox 6150

Humax 6124, 6100

Nokia 6084


Telewest 6101

Thomson 6146

UPC 6146

Virgin Media 6101

Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)

@sat 6127

Allvision 6075

Atsat 6127

B@ytronic 6106, 6075

Boca 6063

BskyB 6086

Bush 6130

Canal Satellite 6154

Comag 6075, 6063

Daewoo 6058

Digifusion 6145

Digihome 6094

DigiQuest 6127

Digital 6063

DMT 6068

Edision 6123 eMTech 6072

GbSAT 6072

Gecco 6075

Globo 6075

Goodmans 6130, 6094

Hirschmann 6106, 6075

Humax 6117, 6118

Huth 6068

Hyundai 6068

Kathrein 6148

LaSAT 6106

LG 6068

Luxor 6141

Maximum 6114

Mediacom 6074

MediaSat 6153

Medion 6106, 6075

Microstar 6068

Morgan’s 6075

MySky 6087, 6088

NEOTION 6114

Nichimen 6130

Nokia 6082

Opentel 6075

Orbis 6075

Pace 6087, 6149

Panasonic 6054

Philips 6139, 6153

Pilotime 6154

Pixx 6067

Proscan 6110

Rebox 6072

Sagem 6134

Samsung 6149, 6074,

6073

Sat Control 6127

Schneider 6074

Schwaiger 6106, 6068,

6075, 6063

Sedea Electronique

6074

Serd 6075

Sharp 6094

SilverCrest 6063

SKY 6086, 6088, 6087

SKY Italia 6088

Sky XL 6075

Skymaster 6068

Skypex 6106

Skyplus 6075, 6106, 6114

Stream System 6127

Sumin 6075

Sunny 6127

Targa 6067

TechniSat 6092, 6099

Technosonic 6130

Telestar 6092, 6099

Thomson 6086, 6141

TNT SAT 6134

Topfield 6074

Viasat 6149

Visiosat 6130, 6067

Wisi 6106

Xoro 6067

Xtreme 6127

Zehnder 6068, 6075,

6125

CD (SACD)

Pioneer 5065, 5066

AKAI 5043

Asuka 5045

Denon 5019

Fisher 5048

Goldstar 5040

Hitachi 5042

CD-R

Pioneer 5067

Philips 5054

Yamaha 5055

Laser Disc Player

Pioneer 5062, 5063

Cassete Deck

Pioneer 5070

Kenwood 5020, 5021,

5031

Luxman 5049

Marantz 5033

Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030,

5050

Panasonic 5036

Philips 5022, 5032, 5044

RCA 5013, 5029

Roadstar 5052

Sharp 5051

Sony 5012, 5023, 5026,

5027, 5028, 5039

TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034,

5035, 5037

Technics 5041

Victor 5014

Yamaha 5024, 5025,

5038, 5046, 5047

Cable Set Top Box

Pioneer 0197, 6081

ABC 6142

ADB 6051

Auna 6051

Austar 6152

Bell & Howell 6142

Birmingham Cable

Communications 6152

Cablecom 6146

Fosgate 6152

France Telecom 6136

Freebox 6150

General Instrument

6152, 6142

Humax 6100, 6124

Jerrold 6152, 6142

Kabel Deutschland

6100

Macab 6136

Madritel 6051

Magnavox 6142

Memorex 6116

Motorola 6152

Nokia 6084

Noos 6136

NTL 6152, 6097

Optus 6152

Orange 6136

Pace 6097

Panasonic 6116

Paragon 6116

Philips 6136, 6146

Digital Tape

Pioneer 5069

MD

Pioneer 5068

En 121

PIONEER CORPORATION

1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 212-0031, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270

K002_B3_En

© 2011 PIONEER CORPORATION.

All rights reserved.

<ARB7462-A>